High efficiency electromagnetic beam projector, and systems and methods for implementation thereof

ABSTRACT

This invention relates to electromagnetic wave beam paths, formation of the beam, illumination of programmable electromagnetic wave field vector orientation rotating devices (“PEMFVORD”) with an electromagnetic beam, and the technique of projection of the modulated beam. This invention also relates to a unique light path and method of forming the light into a rectangular beam to be used for optical projection systems and, more particularly, in a color and/or black and white liquid crystal device (LCD) projectors that produce high resolution, high brightness and/or three-dimensional images. This invention further relates to a device capable of receiving and displaying two-dimensional and three dimensional images.

RELATED APPLICATION

[0001] This is a divisional application of U.S. application Ser. No.09/821,937 filed on Mar. 30, 2001, which is a continuation ofapplication Ser. No. 09/502,889 filed on Feb. 11, 2000, now U.S. Pat.No. 6,243,198, which is a continuation of application Ser. No.09/309,394 filed on May 10, 1999, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,034,818, which isa continuation of application Ser. No. 08/743,390 filed on Nov. 4, 1996,now U.S. Pat. No. 5,903,388, which is a continuation of application Ser.No. 08/344,899, on filed Nov. 25, 1994, now abandoned, which is acontinuation of 07/898,952, filed on Jun. 11, 1992, now abandoned. Theseprior related applications are hereby incorporated by reference in theirentirety for all purposes.

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

[0002] This invention relates to a method and system for producing (i) amodulated beam of electromagnetic energy, (ii) a modulated beam of lightor ultraviolet light, (iii) a visual image for display, (iv) one or morecollinear beams of electromagnetic energy, (v) one or more collinearbeams of ultraviolet light, (vi) a modulated beam of visible light inwhich the brightness of the image increases as the distance from theprojector lens to the screen increases up to a distance of approximately10 feet, (vii) a modulated beam of light for projection of video images,(viii) a collinear beam of electromagnetic energy having two constituentparts, (ix) a collinear beam of light (or ultraviolet light) having twoconstituent parts, (x) one or more collinear beams of electromagneticenergy, (xi) one or more collinear beams of light or ultraviolet light,(xii) a substantially collimated beam of electromagnetic energy havingsubstantially the same selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electromagnetic wave field vectors and a substantiallyuniform flux intensity substantially across the beam of electromagneticenergy for use in the above method and systems, (xiii) a substantiallycollimated beam of light (or ultraviolet light) having substantially thesame selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectric field vectors and a substantially uniform flux intensitysubstantially across the beam of light for use in the above method andsystems, and (xiv) displaying an image in either two dimensions (2D) orthree dimensions 3D). This invention also relates to projection typecolor display devices and projection apparatuses.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

[0003] A disturbance (change in position or state of individualparticles) in the fabric of space-time causes a sphere of influence.Stated in a simplistic manner, the action of one particle influences theactions of the others near it. This sphere of influence is referred toas a “field”, and this field is designated as either electric ormagnetic (after the way it influences other particles). The direction oftravel of the particle is called the direction of propagation. Thepropagation of the particle, the sphere of influence, and the way itinfluences other particles is called an electromagnetic wave, and isshown in FIG. 1.

[0004] As shown in FIG. 1, the electric and magnetic fields areorthogonal (at right angles) to each other and the direction ofpropagation. These fields can be mathematically expressed as a vectorquantity (indicating the direction of influence along with strength,i.e., magnitude, of influence) at a specific point or in a given regionin space. Thus, FIG. 1A is the electromagnetic wave in FIG. 1, but withthe view of looking down the axis of propagation, that is, down the xaxis of FIG. 1. FIG. 1A shows some possible various electric fieldvectors that could exist, although it should be understood that any andall possible vectors can exist around the circle, each having differentmagnitudes.

[0005] Vectors can be resolved into constituent components along twoaxes. This is done for convenience sake and for generating a frame ofreference that we, as humans, can understand. By referring to FIG. 1B,it is shown that the electric field vector E, can be resolved into twoconstituent components, E(y) and E(x). These quantities, then, describethe orientation and the magnitude of the electric field vector along twoaxes, the x and y, although other axes or systems could be chosen. Thesame applies to magnetic fields, except that the X and Z axes would beinvolved

[0006] The ways the electric and magnetic fields vary with time inintensity and direction of propagation have been determined by severalnotable mathematicians and physicists, culminating in a group of basicequations by James Maxwell. These equations, simply applied, state thata field vector can be of one of several different states, that is: 1)the field vector varies randomly over a period of time, or 2) the fieldvector can change directions in a circular manner, or 3) the fieldvector can change directions in a elliptical manner, or 4) the fieldvector can remain constant in magnitude and direction, hence, the fieldvector lies in one plane, and is referred to as planar.

[0007] This orientation of a field vector and the way it changes withtime is called the state of polarization.

[0008] Electromagnetic waves can be resolved into separateelectromagnetic waves with predetermined orientations of a field vector.The electromagnetic waves with a predetermined orientation of a fieldvector can then be directed through materials, such as a liquid crystaldevice, that is capable of changing (or altering) their orientation ofthe field vector upon application of an outside stimulus, as isdemonstrated in FIG. 7. These devices are noted as programmableelectromagnetic wave field orientation rotating devices (PEMFVORD).

[0009] An electromagnetic wave can be characterized by its frequency orwavelength. The electromagnetic spectrum (range) extends from zero, theshort wavelength limit, to infinity, the long wavelength limit.Different wavelength areas have been given names over the years, such ascosmic rays, alpha rays, beta rays, gamma rays, X-rays, ultraviolet,visible light, infrared, microwaves, TV and FM radio, short wave, AM,maritime communications, etc. All of these are just short handexpressions of stating a certain range of frequencies forelectromagnetic waves.

[0010] Different areas of the spectrum interact with electromagneticinfluences upon them in various proportions, with the low end being moreinfluenced by magnetic fields, and the high end being influenced byelectric fields. Thus to contain a nuclear reaction, a magnetic field isused, while controlling light an electric field is used.

[0011]FIG. 2 illustrates a schematic cross section of an LCD cell. TheLCD cell 100 includes a liquid crystal material 101 that is containedbetween two transparent plates 103, 104. Spacers 105, 106 are used toseparate the transparent plates 103, 104. Sealing elements 107, 108 sealthe liquid crystal material 101 between the transparent plates 103, 104.Conductive coatings 109, 110 on the transparent plates 103, 104 conductthe appropriate electrical signals to the liquid crystal material 101.

[0012] A type of liquid crystal material 101 used in most LCD cells foroptical display systems is referred to as “twisted nematic.” In general,with a twisted nematic LCD cell, the molecules of an LCD cell arerotated in the absence of a field through a 90° angle between the upper103 and lower 104 transparent plates. When a field is applied, themolecules are untwisted and line up in the direction of the appliedfield. The change in alignment of the molecules causes a change in thebirefringence of the cell. In the homogeneous ordering, thebirefringence of the cell changes from large to small whereas theopposite occurs in the homeotropic case. The change in birefringencecauses a change in the orientation of the electric field vector for thelight being passing through the LCD. The amount of the rotation in themolecules for an individual LCD cell 100 will determine how much changein polarization (orientation of the electric field vector) of the lightoccurs for that pixel. The light beam is then passed through anothercomponent of the system (i.e., polarizer analyzer) and is resolved intodifferent beams of light by the orientation of their electric fieldvectors, with the light that has a selected predetermined component ofthe electric field vector passing through to finally strike the screenused for the display.

[0013] A twisted nematic LCD cell requires the light incident at the LCDcell 100 to be polarized. The polarized light for a typical projector isgenerally derived from a randomly polarized light source that iscollimated and then filtered by a plastic polarizer to provide a linearpolarized beam. Linear polarized beams are conventionally referred to asbeing S-polarized and P-polarized with the P-polarized beam defined aspolarized in a direction parallel to the plane of incidence and theS-polarized beam defined as polarized perpendicular to the plane ofincidence.

[0014] The development of PEMFVORD technology has resulted in thedevelopment of LCD projectors which utilize one or more LCDs to alterthe orientation of the electric field vector (see FIG. 7) of the lightbeing projected. The birefringence of the individual LCD pixels isselectively altered by suitable apparatus such as cathode ray tubes,lasers, or electronic circuit means. A typical liquid crystal lightvalve (LCLV) projector includes a source lamp which is used to generatea light beam that is directed through a polarizer. This polarized lightis directed through the LCDS to change the polarization according to theimage to be displayed. The light, after exiting the LCD, passes througha plastic polarizer analyzer which stops and absorbs the unwantedportion of light. The formed image is then enlarged with a projectionlens system for forming an enlarged picture on a display screen.

[0015] Color LCLV projectors typically include color separatingapparatus such as a prism, beam splitters or dichroic mirrors toseparate collimated white light beams from the light source into threeprimary color beams (i.e., red, green and blue beams). The red, greenand blue beams are then individually modulated by LCDs and combined byseparate optical apparatus such as combining prisms, mirrors or lenses.

[0016] In general, the quality and brightness of the projected image inany LCLV projector is a function of the brightness of the source forilluminating the LCDs and the polarizing means. Polarizing optics mustbe utilized to filter/separate the white light into light with a singleorientation of the electric field vector. The white light emitted fromthe source is thus only partially utilized (i.e., one direction ofpolarization) in most LCLV projection systems. This requires oversizedlight sources to achieve a desired brightness at the viewing screen.

[0017] Typically, with a twisted nematic transmissive type LCD cellsurrounded by plastic polarizers, only forty percent or less of theoutput of the light source is utilized. Practically, only a maximumtransmission of 50% for randomly polarized light passed through couldever be achieved because of the construction and principles involved inplastic polarizers, allowing for 100% efficiency for the device for allwavelengths. Thus, it is impossible to obtain a full brightnessprojector. Moreover, the unused polarized component of the light sourceis absorbed by the plastic polarizers and generates wasted energy in theform of heat and transfers this heat to other components (i.e., LCDs,electronics, etc.) and hence is detrimental to the system (especiallythe plastic polarizers, LCDs, electronics, etc.). This heat must beeither shielded and/or dissipated from the components of the system, orelse, the light source must be reduced in light output so that theamount of light being absorbed is below the threshold of permanentdamage to the components, including the plastic polarizers. Currently,this threshold for fabricated plastic polarizers is between the range of5-10 watts of light per square inch (0.78-1.55 watts per squarecentimeter), depending upon the wavelength of the illuminating light. Amethod for improving the damage threshold is included in U.S. Pat. No.5,071,234 to Amano, et al., although this patent does not discuss theparticulars of what the damage threshold is.

[0018] Prior art systems have required relatively complicated opticalsystems including the use of polarizing prisms and prepolarizing prismsto ensure a unitary or single polarization at the LCD and to provide asuitable resolution and contrast of the projected image with prior artcolor LCLV projectors, complicated optic components and arrangements arerequired to combine the separated color bands at a suitable resolutionand contrast.

[0019] Representative prior art LCLV projectors are disclosed in U.S.Pat. No. 5,060,058 to Goldenberg, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,048,949 toSato, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,995,702 to Aruga, et al., U.S. Pat. No.4,943,154 to, Miyatake, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,936,658 to Tanaka, etal., U.S. Pat. No. 4,936,656 to Yamashita, et al., U.S. Pat. No.4,935,758 to Miyatake, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,911,547 to Ledebuhr, U.S.Pat. No. 4,909,601 to Yajima, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,904,061 to Aruga,et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,864,390 to McKechnie, U.S. Pat. No. 4,861,142 toTanaka, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,850,685 to Kamakura, U.S. Pat. No.4,842,374 to Ledebuhr, U.S. Pat. No. 4,836,649 to Ledebuhr, et al., U.S.Pat. No. 4,826,311 to Ledebuhr, U.S. Pat. No. 4,786,146 to Ledebuhr,U.S. Pat. No. 4,772,098 to Ogawa, U.S. Pat. No. 4,749,259 to Ledebuhr,U.S. Pat. No. 4,739,396 to Hyatt, U.S. Pat. No. 4,690,526 to Ledebuhr,U.S. Pat. No. 4,687,301 to Ledebuhr, U.S. Pat. No. 4,650,286 to Koda, etal., U.S. Pat. No. 4,647,966 to Phillips, et al., U.S. Pat. No.4,544,237 to Gagnon, U.S. Pat. No. 4,500,172 to Gagnon, U.S. Pat. No.4,464,019 to Gagnon, U.S. Pat. No. 4,464,018 to Gagnon, U.S. Pat. No.4,461,542 to Gagnon, U.S. Pat. No. 4,425,028 to Gagnon, U.S. Pat. No.4,191,456 to Hong, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,127,322 to Jacobson, et al.,U.S. Pat. No. 4,588,324, to Marie, U.S. Pat. No. 4,943,155 to Cross,Jr., U.S. Pat. No. 4,936,657 to Tejima, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,928,123to Takafuji, U.S. Pat. No. 4,922,336 to Morton, U.S. Pat. No. 4,875,064to Umeda, U.S. Pat. No. 4,872,750 to Morishita, U.S. Pat. No. 4,824,210to Shimazaki, U.S. Pat. No. 4,770,525 to Umeda, et al., U.S. Pat. No.4,715,684 to Gagnon, U.S. Pat. No. 4,699,498 to Naemura, et al., U.S.Pat. No. 4,693,557 to Fergason, U.S. Pat. No. 4,671,634 to Kizaki, etal., U.S. Pat. No. 4,613,207 to Fergason, U.S. Pat. No. 4,611,889 toBuzak, U.S. Pat. No. 4,295,159 to Carollo, et al. Prior art illuminationsystems for overcoming problems with the brightness of LCD displayillumination systems have not been completely successful. Prior artillumination systems for overcoming problems with the brightness of LCDdisplay illumination systems have not been completely successful.

[0020] An example of an illumination system that attempts to utilize thefull output of a light source for increasing the brightness of an LCDdisplay is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,028,121 to Baur, et al., In theBaur system, the randomly polarized light source is resolved into twoseparate polarized beams, with one of the polarized beams passed to adichroic color splitter that then directs the segregated color beams toa set of reflecting LCDs, while the other beam of different polarizationis sent to a different set of LCDs through a different dichroicsplitter. After having each respective portion of the beams' electricfield vector altered, the beam is then reflected back through thedichroic mirrors into the polarizing beam splitter/combiner. The pictureto be represented is sent to the projection lens, while the rejectedbeam is sent back into the light source. This causes the light source toheat and have a shortened life span. Furthermore, each sequential fieldto be projected has a different brightness level illuminating eachpixel, depending upon the amount of light that is rejected back into thelight source.

[0021] For example, if a light source has an average output of 1000lumens and the sequential field to be projected has an averagebrightness level of 30% then 700 lumens would be reflected back into thelight source, making the light emitted from the source to be aneffective 1700 lumens. In the next sequential field, if the averagebrightness level is 50% then 500 lumens would be reflected back into thelight source, making the light emitted from the source to be effectively1500 lumens. This can be alleviated by computing the average brightnesslevel to be projected, and then modulating the brightness level of thelight source when the field is changed for projection so that theillumination of a pixel is at a constant brightness. This system canfurther be modified by (or be a stand alone system) that would monitorthe light output of the light source and change the driving circuitry ofthe light source to maintain a constant brightness level. This can bemonitored by a light transducer that monitors the light from a beamsplitter, or alternately, can be mounted directly on a LCD panel outsideof the picture forming active area. However, the addition of any of theabove circuitry further complicates the projector and makes the lightsource an active part of the system, increasing the cost and complexityof the projector.

[0022] Another example of an illumination system that attempts toutilize the full output of a light source for increasing the brightnessof an LCD display is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,913,529 to Goldenberg,et al. In the Goldenberg system, a beam of light, from a light source,is split into two orthogonally linear polarized beams. One of the beamsis then passed through a device that rotates one of the beams to changeits direction of polarization so that there are two beams of the samepolarization. The beams of the same polarization are then directedthrough different faces of a prism, combined by the prism and focused onthe LCD devices.

[0023] A problem with such a system is that the beams are not collinear.The beams illuminate the polarizer at different angles, causing an areaof usable light, and another area of unusable light. The result is thatall of the light available is not used. Another obstacle is that it isdifficult to align the combined beams with the use of a prism. Yetanother complication is that the prism tends to separate the light intoseparate colors. This detracts from the clarity, brightness and limitsthe resolution of the projected image. Still another complication isthat the performance of polarizers vary with the angle of lightilluminating them, causing different polarizations and different colorgradations to occur in the beam.

[0024] Other systems, such as those disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,824,214to Ledebuhr, U.S. Pat. No. 4,127,322 to Jacobson, et al., U.S. Pat. No.4,836,649 to Ledebuhr, et al., and U.S. Pat. No. 3,512,868 toGorklewiez, et al. also disclose optical layouts for achieving a highbrightness in display systems that utilize LCD devices. In general,these systems are relatively complicated and contain numerous componentsthat are large, expensive, and difficult to adjust.

[0025] Representative prior art flat fluorescent light sources aredisclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,978,888 to Anandan, et al., and U.S. Pat.No. 4,920,298 to Hinotani, et al.

[0026] Representative prior art light integrators for light sources aredisclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,918,583 to Kudo, et al., U.S. Pat. No.4,787,013 to Sugino, et al., and U.S. Pat. No. 4,769,750 to Matsumoto,et al.

[0027] Various prior art techniques and apparatus have been heretoforeproposed to present 3-D or stereographic images on a viewing screen,such as on a polarization conserving motion picture screen. See U.S.Pat. No. 4,955,718 to Jachimowicz, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,963,959 toDrewio, U.S. Pat. No. 4,962,422 to Ohtomo, et al., U.S. Pat. No.4,959,641 to Bess, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,957,351 to Shioji, U.S. Pat.No. 4,954,890 to Park, U.S. Pat. No. 4,945,408 to Medina, U.S. Pat. No.4,936,658 to Tanaka, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,933,755 to Dahl, U.S. Pat.No. 4,922,336 to Morton, U.S. Pat. No. 4,907,860 to Noble, U.S. Pat. No.4,877,307 to Kalmanash, U.S. Pat. No. 4,872,750 to Morishita, U.S. Pat.No. 4,870,486 to Nakagawa, U.S. Pat. No. 4,853,764 to Sutter, U.S. Pat.No. 4,851,901 to Iwasaki, U.S. Pat. No. 4,834,473 to Keyes, et al., U.S.Pat. No. 4,807,024 to McLaurin, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,799,763 toDavis, U.S. Pat. No. 4,772,943 to Nakagawa, U.S. Pat. No. 4,736,246 toNishikawa, U.S. Pat. No. 4,649,425 to Pund, U.S. Pat. No. 4,641,178 toStreet, U.S. Pat. No. 4,541,007 to Nagata, U.S. Pat. No. 4,523,226 toLipton, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,376,950 to Brown, et al., U.S. Pat. No.4,323,920 to Collendar, U.S. Pat. No. 4,295,153 to Gibson, U.S. Pat. No.4,151,549 to Bautzc, U.S. Pat. No. 3,697,675 to Beard, et al., Ingeneral, these techniques and apparatus involve the display of polarizedor color sequential two-dimensional images which contain correspondingright eye and left eye perspective views of three-dimensional objects.These separate images can also be displayed simultaneously in differentpolarizations or colors. Suitable eyewear, such as glasses havingdifferent polarizing or color separating coatings, permit the separateimages to be seen by one or the other eye. This type of system isrelatively expensive and complicated requiring two separate projectorsand is adapted mainly for stereoscopic movies for theaters. U.S. Pat.No. 4,954,890 to Park discloses a representative projector employing thetechnique of alternating polarization.

[0028] Another technique involves a timed sequence in which imagescorresponding to right-eye and left-eye perspectives are presented intimed sequence with the use of electronic light valves. U.S. Pat. No.4,970,486 to Nakagawa, et al., and U.S. Pat. No. 4,877,307 to Kalmanashdisclose representative prior art stereographic display systems of thistype.

[0029] While previous time sequential light valve systems are adaptableto display arrangements for a television set, because of problemsassociated with color, resolution and contrast of the projected image,they have not received widespread commercial acceptance. Moreover, thesystems proposed to date have also been relatively expensive andcomplicated.

BRIEF SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

[0030] One object of this invention is to provide a method and systemfor producing a modulated beam of electromagnetic energy comprising:producing an initial beam of electromagnetic energy having apredetermined range of wavelengths and having a substantially uniformflux intensity substantially across the initial beam of electromagneticenergy; separating the initial beam of electromagnetic energy into twoor more separate beams of electromagnetic energy, each of the separatebeams of electromagnetic energy having a selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors(or, in the case of a beam of light, and a beam of ultraviolet light,electric field vector); altering the selected predetermined orientationof the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of aplurality of portions of each of the separate beams of electromagneticenergy by passing the plurality of portions of each of the separatebeams of electromagnetic energy through a respective one of a pluralityof altering means whereby the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the separate beams of electromagneticenergy is altered in response to a stimulus means by applying a signalmeans to the stimulus means in a predetermined manner as the pluralityof portions of each of the substantially separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy passes through the respective one of theplurality of means for altering the selected predetermined orientationof the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors;combining the altered separate beams of electromagnetic energy into asingle collinear beam of electromagnetic energy without substantiallychanging the altered selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of the plurality ofportions of each of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy; andresolving from the single collinear beam of electromagnetic energy afirst resolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially afirst selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors and a second resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy having substantially a second selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors, whereby the first and second selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors are different from one another.

[0031] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid for modulating a beam of light and a beam ofultraviolet light.

[0032] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid in which the step of producing a beam ofelectromagnetic energy includes producing a beam of electromagneticenergy having a random orientation of electromagnetic wave field vector(or, in the case of a beam of light and a beam of ultraviolet light,electric field vector) and the step of separating the beam ofelectromagnetic energy into two or more separate electromagnetic energybeams includes separating said beam into said separated beams wherebyeach of said separated beams has the same orientation of electromagneticwave field vector (or, in the case of a beam of light or ultravioletlight, electric field vector).

[0033] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid in which the step of producing a beam ofelectromagnetic energy includes the step of producing a beam ofelectromagnetic energy having the same orientation of electromagneticwave field vector (or, in the case of a beam of light and a beam ofultraviolet light, electric field vector).

[0034] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid in which the step of producing a beam ofelectromagnetic energy includes producing a collimated beam ofelectromagnetic energy.

[0035] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid in which the step of producing a beam ofelectromagnetic energy includes producing a rectangular beam ofelectromagnetic energy.

[0036] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid including the step of passing one of said segregatedbeams of electromagnetic energy to a projection means.

[0037] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid including the step of adjusting the electromagneticenergy beams of at least one of separated beams. The step of adjustingthe electromagnetic energy may be accomplished by adjusting thewavelengths and/or intensity of at least one of the separated beams.

[0038] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid in which the step of separating a beam ofelectromagnetic energy includes separating the beam of electromagneticenergy into two or more separate electromagnetic energy beams, eachseparated beam having a different electromagnetic energy spectrum.

[0039] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid in which the step for separating the initial beam ofelectromagnetic energy into two or more separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy further includes the step of separating theinitial beam of electromagnetic energy into two or more separate beamsof electromagnetic energy with each of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy having a predetermined range of wavelengthsdifferent from each of the other separate beams of electromagneticenergy.

[0040] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem of producing a modulated beam of electromagnetic energy,comprising: providing a substantially collimated primary beam ofelectromagnetic energy having a predetermined range of wavelengths;resolving from the substantially collimated primary beam ofelectromagnetic energy a substantially collimated primary first resolvedbeam of electromagnetic energy having substantially a first selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors (or in the case of a beam of light and a beam ofultraviolet light, electric field vector) and a substantially collimatedprimary second resolved beam of electromagnetic energy havingsubstantially a second selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors, whereby the firstand second selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electromagnetic wave field vectors are different from one another;forming from the substantially collimated primary first resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy and the substantially collimated primary secondresolved beam of electromagnetic energy a substantially collimatedinitial beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially the sameselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors substantially across thesubstantially collimated initial beam of electromagnetic energy and asubstantially uniform flux intensity substantially across thesubstantially collimated initial beam of electromagnetic energy;separating the substantially collimated initial beam of electromagneticenergy into two or more substantially collimated separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy, each of the substantially collimated separatebeams of electromagnetic energy having a selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors;altering the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electromagnetic wave field vectors of a plurality of portions ofeach of the substantially collimated separate beams of electromagneticenergy by passing the plurality of portions of each of the substantiallycollimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy through a respectiveone of a plurality of altering means whereby the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors of the plurality of portions of each of the substantiallycollimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy is altered inresponse to a stimulus means by applying a signal means to the stimulusmeans in a predetermined manner as the plurality of portions of each ofthe substantially collimated separate beams of electromagnetic energypasses through the respective one of the plurality of means for alteringthe selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors; combining the substantiallycollimated altered separate beams of electromagnetic energy into asubstantially collimated single collinear beam of electromagnetic energywithout substantially changing the altered selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors of the plurality of portions of each of the substantiallycollimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy; and resolving fromthe substantially collimated single collinear beam of electromagneticenergy a substantially collimated first resolved beam of electromagneticenergy having substantially a first selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors and asubstantially collimated second resolved beam of electromagnetic energyhaving substantially a second selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors, whereby thefirst and second selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors are different fromone another.

[0041] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid for producing a modulated beam of light and a beamof ultraviolet light.

[0042] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid in which the step of separating includes separatingthe substantially collimated initial beam of electromagnetic energy intotwo or more substantially collimated separate beams of electromagneticenergy whereby each of the substantially collimated separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy has substantially the same selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors substantially across each of the substantially collimatedseparate beams of electromagnetic energy as that of the othersubstantially collimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy.

[0043] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid in which the step of forming includes forming thesubstantially collimated initial beam of electromagnetic energy furtherhaving a rectangular cross-sectional area.

[0044] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid further comprising the step of passing one of thesubstantially collimated resolved beams of electromagnetic energy to aprojection means.

[0045] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid further comprising the step of adjusting theelectromagnetic spectrum of at least one of the substantially collimatedseparate beams of electromagnetic energy.

[0046] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of adjusting the electromagneticspectrum of at least one of the substantially collimated separate beamsof electromagnetic energy includes adjusting a predetermined range ofwavelengths of at least one of the substantially collimated separatebeams of electromagnetic energy. The step of adjusting theelectromagnetic energy may be accomplished by adjusting the wavelengthsand/or intensity of at least one of the separated beams.

[0047] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of separating includes separatingthe substantially collimated initial beam of electromagnetic energy intotwo or more substantially collimated separate beams of electromagneticenergy whereby each of the substantially collimated separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy has a substantially different selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors substantially across each of the substantiallycollimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy from that of theother substantially collimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy.

[0048] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid further comprising the step of passing one of thesubstantially collimated primary resolved beams of electromagneticenergy through a means for changing the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors.

[0049] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of passing one of the substantiallycollimated primary resolved beams of electromagnetic energy through ameans for changing the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors includes passing oneof the substantially collimated primary resolved beams ofelectromagnetic energy through a liquid crystal device for changing theselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors.

[0050] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid further comprising the step of passing one of thesubstantially collimated primary resolved beams of electromagneticenergy through a means for changing a selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors and changingthe selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors of one of the substantiallycollimated primary resolved beam of electromagnetic energy to matchsubstantially the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of the othersubstantially collimated primary resolved beam of electromagneticenergy.

[0051] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of forming further comprises thestep of providing one or more reflecting means, each of the reflectingmeans having means for changing the selected predetermined orientationof the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors, andreflecting one of the substantially collimated primary resolved beams ofelectromagnetic energy from one or more of the reflecting means.

[0052] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of providing one or more reflectingmeans, each of the reflecting means including one or more planarreflecting surface with a dielectric coating, each planar reflectingsurface with a dielectric coating having means for changing the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors, and reflecting one of the substantially collimatedprimary resolved beams of electromagnetic energy from one or more of theplanar reflecting surfaces with a dielectric coating.

[0053] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of providing one or more reflectingmeans, each of the reflecting means including a mirror having a thinfilm dielectric material, each mirror having a thin film dielectricmaterial having means for changing the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors, and reflecting one of the substantially collimated primaryresolved beams of electromagnetic energy from one or more of the mirrorshaving a thin film dielectric material.

[0054] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of providing a substantiallycollimated primary beam of electromagnetic energy further having asubstantially uniform flux intensity across substantially the entireprimary beam of electromagnetic energy.

[0055] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid further comprising the step of removing from atleast one of the beams of electromagnetic energy at least apredetermined portion of a predetermined range of wavelengths.

[0056] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid further including directing the removed portions toan absorption means.

[0057] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid further comprising the step of removing from thesubstantially collimated primary beam of electromagnetic energy at leasta predetermined portion of a predetermined range of wavelengths anddirecting the removed portions to an absorption means.

[0058] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem of displaying an image comprising:

[0059] [a] a method of displaying an image, comprising: providing anillumination subsystem including producing a primary beam of lighthaving a predetermined range of wavelengths, randomly changingorientations of a chosen component of electric field vectors, and asubstantially uniform flux intensity substantially across the initialbeam of light;

[0060] [b] providing a modulation subsystem, including;

[0061] [i] separating the primary beam of light into two or more primarycolor beams of light, each of the primary color beams having the sameselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of electricfield vectors as that of the other primary color beams;

[0062] [ii] providing two or more altering means for changing theselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of electricfield vectors;

[0063] (iii] altering the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electric field vectors of a plurality ofportions of each of the separate primary color beams of light by passingthe plurality of portions of each of the separate primary color beam orbeams of light through a respective one of a plurality of altering meanswhereby the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electric field vectors of the plurality of portions of each ofthe separate primary color beams of light is altered in response to astimulus means by applying a signal means to the stimulus means in apredetermined manner as the plurality of portions of each of theseparate primary color beams of light passes through the respective oneof the plurality of means for altering the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors;

[0064] [iv] combining the altered separate primary color beams of lightinto a single collinear beam of light without substantially changing thealtered selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electric field vectors of the plurality of portions of each of theseparate beams of light;

[0065] [v] resolving from the single collinear beam of light a firstresolved beam of light having substantially a first selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors and a second resolved beam of light having substantially asecond selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectric field vectors, whereby the first and second selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors are different from one another;

[0066] [c] providing a projection subsystem and passing at least one ofthe resolved beams of light thereto; and

[0067] [d]

[0068] [i] forming a first light path from the illumination subsystem tothe altering means in which the first light path is equal for allaltering means; and

[0069] (ii] forming a second light path from each of the altering meansto the projection subsystem in which the second light path is equal forall altering means.

[0070] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem for displaying an image projected from a liquid crystal devicewhich includes means for a first liquid crystal light valve, a secondliquid crystal light valve and a third liquid crystal light valve,comprising: means for producing a primary beam of light having apredetermined range of wavelengths, randomly changing orientations of achosen component of electric field vectors, and a substantially uniformflux intensity substantially across the initial beam of light; means forseparating the primary beam of light into two or more primary colorbeams of light, each of the primary color beams having the same selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors as that of the other primary color beams; means for forming theoptical light paths between the light source and the three liquidcrystal light valves which are unequal in length and based on luminousintensity of the primary colors associated with respective light valveproduced by the light source; means for altering the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors of a plurality of portions of each of the separate primary colorbeams of light by passing the plurality of portions of each of theseparate primary color beams of light through a respective one of theliquid crystal light valves whereby the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the separate primary color beams oflight is altered in response to a stimulus means by applying a signalmeans to the stimulus means in a predetermined manner as the pluralityof portions of each of the separate primary color beams of light passesthrough the respective one of the liquid crystal light valves alteringthe selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors; means for combining the altered separate primarycolor beams of light into a single collinear beam of light withoutsubstantially changing the altered selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electric field vectors of the plurality ofportions of each of the separate beams of light; means for resolvingfrom the single collinear beam of light a first resolved beam of lighthaving substantially a first selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electric field vectors and a second resolved beam oflight having substantially a second selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of electric field vectors, whereby the first andsecond selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors are different from one another; and means forpassing at least one of the resolved beams to a projection means.

[0071] Another object of this invention is to provide a projection-typecolor display device, comprising: means for producing a collimatedprimary beam of light having a predetermined range of wavelengths,randomly changing orientations of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors, a substantially uniform flux intensity substantially across theinitial beam of light, and a rectangular cross sectional area; means forseparating the collimated primary beam of light into the primary colorbeams of red, blue and green, each of the primary color beams having thesame selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectric field vectors as that of the other primary color beams; meansfor altering the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors of a plurality of portions ofeach of the separate primary color beams of red, blue and green bypassing the plurality of portions of each of the separate primary colorbeams of red, blue and green through a respective one of a plurality ofliquid crystal light valves whereby the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the separate primary color beams ofred, blue and green is altered in response to a stimulus means byapplying a signal means to the stimulus means in a predetermined manneras the plurality of portions of each of the separate primary color beamsof light passes through the respective one of the liquid crystal lightvalves altering the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors; means for combining the alteredseparate primary color beams into a single collinear beam of lightwithout substantially changing the altered selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the separate beams of red, blue andgreen by passing the altered separate primary color beams through acolor synthesis cube having a reflecting surface for synthesizing thered, blue and green beams into a single collinear beam of light; meansfor resolving from the single collinear beam of light a first resolvedbeam of light having substantially a first selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electric field vectors and a secondresolved beam of light having substantially a second selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors, whereby the first and second selected predetermined orientationof the chosen component of the electric field vectors are different fromone another; and means for passing at least one of the resolved beams toa projection means.

[0072] Another object of this invention is to provide a projectionapparatus, comprising: means for producing a primary beam of lighthaving a predetermined range of wavelengths, randomly changingorientations of a chosen component of electric field vectors, asubstantially uniform flux intensity substantially across the initialbeam of light, and a rectangular cross sectional area; means forseparating the primary beam of light into three primary color beams oflight, each of the primary color beams having the same selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors as that of the other primary color beams; three means foraltering the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electric field vectors of a plurality of portions of each of theseparate primary color beams of light by passing the plurality ofportions of each of the separate primary color beams of light through arespective one of the altering means whereby the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the separate primary color beams oflight is altered in response to a stimulus means by applying a signalmeans to the stimulus means in a predetermined manner as the pluralityof portions of each of the separate primary color beams of light passesthrough the respective one of the means for altering the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors; means for combining the altered separate primary color beams oflight into a single collinear beam of light without substantiallychanging the altered selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors of the plurality of portions ofeach of the separate beams of light by dichroic reflection surfacesintersecting in X-letter form; means for resolving from the singlecollinear beam of light a first resolved beam of light havingsubstantially a first selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electric field vectors and a second resolved beam of lighthaving substantially a second selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electric field vectors, whereby the first and secondselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors are different from one another; means for passingat least one of the resolved beams from the single collinear beam oflight to a projection means; a driving circuit for driving each of thethree altering means according to the signal means; wherein the colorseparating means comprises a first flat-plate type dichroic mirror and asecond flat-plate type dichroic mirror intersecting in X-letter form,light paths from the intersecting part to each of the altering meanshaving lengths such that the path of the color light which advancesstraightly through the color separating means is the shortest, thesecond dichroic mirror being constructed by two dichroic mirrorsseparated at the intersecting part so that the dichroic reflectingsurfaces of the two dichroic mirrors are placed on mutually differentplanes to allow two-edge surfaces of the two dichroic mirrors formingthe intersecting part to be seen as being at least partially overlappingwhen the color-separating means is observed from the output light sidein a direction along its input light.

[0073] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem of producing one or more collinear beams of electromagneticenergy, comprising: producing two or more separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy, each of the separate beams of electromagneticenergy having the same selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electromagnetic wave field vectors substantially acrosseach beam, a predetermined range of wavelengths and a substantiallyuniform flux intensity substantially across the beam of electromagneticenergy; altering the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of a plurality ofportions of each of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy bypassing the plurality of portions of each of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy through a respective one of a plurality ofaltering means whereby the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the separate beams of electromagneticenergy is altered in response to a stimulus means by applying a signalmeans to the stimulus means in a predetermined manner as the pluralityof portions of each of the separate beams of electromagnetic energypasses through the respective one of the plurality of means for alteringthe selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors; combining the altered separate beamsof electromagnetic energy into a single collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy without substantially changing the alteredselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors of the plurality of portions of eachof the separate beams of electromagnetic energy; and resolving from thesingle collinear beam of electromagnetic energy a first resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy having substantially a first selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors and a second resolved beam of electromagnetic energyhaving substantially a second selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors, whereby thefirst and second selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors are different fromone another.

[0074] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid for producing one or more collinear beams of lightand a beam of ultraviolet light.

[0075] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid in which the step of producing includes producingeach separate beam of electromagnetic energy further having arectangular cross-sectional area.

[0076] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid further comprising the step of passing one of theresolved beams of electromagnetic energy to a projection means.

[0077] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid further comprising the step of adjusting theelectromagnetic spectrum of at least one of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy.

[0078] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of adjusting the electromagneticspectrum of at least one of the separate beams of electromagnetic energyincludes adjusting a predetermined range of wavelengths of at least oneof the separate beams of electromagnetic energy. The step of adjustingthe electromagnetic energy may be accomplished by adjusting thewavelengths and/or intensity of at least one of the separate beams.

[0079] Another object of this invention is to provide a method ofproducing a modulated beam of electromagnetic energy in which thebrightness of the image increases as the distance from the projectorlens to a screen increases up to a distance of approximately 10 feet,comprising: producing a beam of electromagnetic energy having asubstantially uniform flux intensity substantially across the entirebeam; separating the beam of electromagnetic energy into two or moreseparate electromagnetic energy beams, each of the electromagneticenergy beams having a predetermined orientation of electromagnetic wavefield vector; passing a plurality of portions of each separatedelectromagnetic energy beam through a respective one of a plurality ofmeans for changing the orientation of the electromagnetic wave fieldvector whereby the orientation of electromagnetic wave field vector ofthe plurality of portions of the electromagnetic energy beams is alteredas same passes through the respective one of the plurality of means forchanging the orientation of electromagnetic wave field vector; combiningthe separated electromagnetic energy beams into a single collinear beamof electromagnetic energy without changing the altered orientation ofthe electromagnetic wave field vector of the plurality of portions ofthe electromagnetic energy beams; producing two segregatedelectromagnetic energy beams from the collinear beam, each segregatedelectromagnetic energy beam having an orientation of electromagneticwave field vector different from the other electromagnetic energy beam;locating a projection means such that the distance of the light pathbetween the projection means and each of the plurality of means forchanging the orientation of the electromagnetic wave field vector issubstantially equal; passing one of the segregated beams ofelectromagnetic beams of electromagnetic energy to the projection means;locating a surface means up to approximately 10 feet of the projectionmeans; and passing the one of the segregated beams of electromagneticenergy from the projection means to the surface means.

[0080] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem of producing a modulated beam of light suitable for projection ofvideo images, comprising: producing an initial beam of light; separatingthe initial beam of light into two or more separate beams of colorswhereby each separate beam of color has the same single selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electric fieldvectors as that of the other separate beams of color and each separatebeam of color having a color different from the other separate beams ofcolors; altering the single selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electric field vectors of a plurality ofportions of each separate beam of color by passing a plurality ofportions of each separate beam of color through a respective one of aplurality of altering means whereby the single selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of theplurality of portions of each separate beam of color is altered inresponse to a stimulus means by applying a signal means to the stimulusmeans in a predetermined manner as the plurality of portions of each ofthe substantially separate beams of electromagnetic energy passesthrough the respective one of the plurality of means for altering thesingle selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of theelectric field vectors; combining altered separate beams of color into asingle collinear color beam without substantially changing the alteredselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors of the plurality of portions of each of theseparate beam of color; and resolving from the single collinear colorbeam a first resolved color beam having substantially a first singleselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electricfield vectors and second resolved color beam having substantially asecond single selected predetermined orientation of a chosen componentof the electric field vectors, whereby the first and second singleselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors are different from one another.

[0081] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid which further comprises the step of passing one ofthe resolved color beams to a projection means.

[0082] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid in which the step of producing includes producing aninitial collimated beam of light having a substantially uniform fluxintensity across substantially the entire initial collimated beam oflight and substantially the same single selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of the electric field vectors acrosssubstantially the entire initial collimated beam of light.

[0083] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid which further includes the step of removing from theinitial collimated beam of light at least a portion of ultraviolet andat least a portion of infrared to produce an initial collimated beam ofwhite light and directing the removed portions to a beam stop wherebythe removed ultraviolet and infrared is absorbed.

[0084] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem in which the step of separating further includes the step ofadjusting by removing at least a predetermined portion of color of atleast one of the separate collimated beams of color and directing theremoved portion to a beam stop whereby the removed portion is absorbed.

[0085] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid in which the step of producing includes producing aninitial collimated rectangular beam of light having a substantiallyuniform flux intensity across substantially the entire initialcollimated rectangular beam of light and having substantially the samesingle selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of theelectric field vectors across substantially the entire initialcollimated rectangular beam of light.

[0086] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem of producing a modulated beam of light suitable for projection ofvideo images, comprising: providing a first initial beam of light havingrandomly changing orientations of the selected component of the electricfield vectors; integrating the first initial beam of light to form asecond initial beam of light having a substantially uniform fluxintensity across substantially the entire second initial beam of light;collimating the second initial beam of light into an initial collimatedbeam of light having randomly changing orientations of the selectedcomponent of the electric field vectors and a substantially uniform fluxintensity across substantially the entire second initial beam of lightremoving from the initial collimated beam of light at least a portion ofultraviolet and infrared to produce an initial collimated beam of whitelight and directing the removed portions to a beam stop whereby theremoved portion is absorbed; resolving from the initial collimated beamof white light an initial collimated first resolved beam of white lighthaving substantially a first single selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of the electric field vectors and an initialcollimated second resolved beam of white light having substantially asecond single selected predetermined orientation of a chosen componentof the electric field vectors, whereby the first and second singleselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors are different from one another; forming from theinitial collimated first resolved beam of white light and initialcollimated second resolved beam of white light a substantiallycollimated rectangular initial single beam of white light havingsubstantially the same single selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of the electric field vectors across substantially theentire beam of light and a substantially uniform flux intensity acrosssubstantially the entire initial collimated single beam of white light;separating the collimated rectangular initial single beam of white lightinto two or more separate collimated rectangular beams of color wherebyeach of the separate collimated rectangular beam of color has the samesingle selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of theelectric field vectors as that of the other separate collimatedrectangular beams of colors and each separate collimated rectangularbeam of color having a different color from the other separatecollimated rectangular beams of colors; adjusting the color by removingat least a predetermined portion of color of at least one of theseparate collimated rectangular beam of colors and directing the removedportion to a beam stop whereby the removed portion is absorbed; alteringthe single selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electric field vectors of a plurality of portions of each separatecollimated rectangular beam of color by passing a plurality of portionsof each separate collimated rectangular beam of color through arespective one of a plurality of altering means whereby the singleselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors of the plurality of portions of each separatebeam of color is altered in response to a stimulus means by applying asignal means to the stimulus means in a predetermined manner as theplurality of portions of each of the substantially collimated separatebeams of electromagnetic energy passes through the respective one of theplurality of altering the single selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of the electric field vectors; combining the alteredseparate collimated rectangular beams of color into a single collimatedrectangular collinear color beam without substantially changing thealtered selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electric field vectors of the plurality of portions of each separatecollimated rectangular beam of color; resolving from the singlecollimated rectangular collinear color beam a first collimatedrectangular resolved color beam having substantially a first singleselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electricfield vectors and second collimated rectangular resolved color beamhaving substantially a second single selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of the electric field vectors, whereby the firstand second single selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors are different from one another;and passing one of the first collimated rectangular or second collimatedrectangular resolved color beam to a projection means.

[0087] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem of producing a collinear beam of electromagnetic energy havingtwo constituent parts, comprising:

[0088] [a] providing a substantially collimated primary beam ofelectromagnetic energy having a predetermined range of wavelengths andrandomly changing orientations of a chosen component of electromagneticwave field vectors;

[0089] [b] resolving the substantially collimated primary beam ofelectromagnetic energy into a substantially collimated primary firstresolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially a firstselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors and a substantially collimatedprimary second resolved beam of electromagnetic energy havingsubstantially a second selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors;

[0090] [c] separating each of the substantially collimated primaryresolved beams of electromagnetic energy into two or more substantiallycollimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy, each of thesubstantially collimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy havinga selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors;

[0091] [d] altering the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of a plurality ofportions of each of the substantially collimated separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy by passing the plurality of portions of each ofthe substantially collimated separate beams of electromagnetic energythrough a respective one of a plurality of altering means whereby theselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors of the plurality of portions of eachof the substantially collimated separate beams of electromagnetic energyis altered in response to a stimulus means by applying a signal means tothe stimulus means in a predetermined manner as the plurality ofportions of each of the substantially collimated separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy passes through the respective one of theplurality of means for altering the selected predetermined orientationof the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors;

[0092] [e]

[0093] [i] combining the substantially collimated altered separate beamsof electromagnetic energy of the primary first resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy into a first substantially collimated singlecollinear beam of electromagnetic energy without substantially changingthe altered selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electromagnetic wave field vectors of the plurality of portionsof each of the substantially collimated separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy, and

[0094] [ii] combining the substantially collimated altered separatebeams of electromagnetic energy of the primary second resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy into a second substantially collimated singlecollinear beam of electromagnetic energy without substantially changingthe altered selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electromagnetic wave field vectors of the plurality of portionsof each of the substantially collimated separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy;

[0095] [f]

[0096] [i] resolving from the first substantially collimated singlecollinear beam of electromagnetic energy a substantially collimatedfirst resolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially thefirst selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors and a substantially collimated secondresolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially the secondselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors, and

[0097] [ii] resolving from the second substantially collimated singlecollinear beam of electromagnetic energy a substantially collimatedfirst resolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially thefirst selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors and a substantially collimated secondresolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially the secondselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors; and

[0098] [g] merging one of the resolved beams of electromagnetic energyfrom the first substantially collimated single collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy with one of the other resolved beams ofelectromagnetic energy from the second substantially collimated singlecollinear beam of electromagnetic energy into a substantially collimatedthird single collinear beam of electromagnetic energy.

[0099] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid for producing a collinear beam as aforesaid forproducing a collinear beam of light having two constituent parts and abeam of ultraviolet light having two constituent parts.

[0100] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of resolving further includesresolving the primary beam into first and second resolved beams in whichthe first selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electromagnetic wave field vectors has the same selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors as that of the second selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors.

[0101] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of resolving further includesresolving the primary beam into first and second resolved beams in whichthe first selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electromagnetic wave field vectors has the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors different from the second selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors.

[0102] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of merging further includes themerging of the resolved beams in which the plurality of portions of oneof the merged beams has a different selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors as that ofthe plurality of portions of the other merged beam.

[0103] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of merging further includes mergingof the resolved beams in which each merged beam has its plurality ofportions parallel and noncoincident to the plurality of portions as thatof the other merged beam.

[0104] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of merging further includes mergingof the resolved beams in which each merged beam has its plurality ofportions parallel and partially coincident to the plurality of portionsas that of the other merged beam.

[0105] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of merging further includes mergingof the resolved beams in which each merged beam has its plurality ofportions parallel and simultaneous to the plurality of portions as thatof the other merged beam.

[0106] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of merging further includes mergingof the resolved beams in which each merged beam has its plurality ofportions parallel, noncoincident and simultaneous to the plurality ofportions as that of the other merged beam.

[0107] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of merging further includes mergingof the resolved beams in which each merged beam has its plurality ofportions parallel, partially coincident and simultaneous to theplurality of portions as that of the other merged beam.

[0108] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of merging further includes mergingof the resolved beams in which the plurality of portions of one of themerged beams has the substantially same selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectorsas that of the plurality of portions of the other merged beam.

[0109] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of merging further includes mergingof the resolved beams in which the plurality of portions of one of themerged beams has the substantially same selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectorsas that of the plurality of portions of the other merged beam andfurther includes each merged beam having its plurality of portionsparallel and noncoincident to the plurality of portions as that of theother merged beam.

[0110] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of merging further includes mergingof the resolved beams in which the plurality of portions of one of themerged beams has the substantially same selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectorsas that of the plurality of portions of the other merged beam andfurther includes each merged beam having its plurality of portionsparallel and partially coincident to the plurality of portions as thatof the other merged beam.

[0111] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of merging further includes mergingof the resolved beams in which the plurality of portions of one of themerged beams has the substantially same selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectorsas that of the plurality of portions of the other merged beam andfurther includes each merged beam having its plurality of portionsparallel and simultaneous to the plurality of portions as that of theother merged beam.

[0112] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem further comprising the step of passing the substantiallycollimated third single collinear beam of electromagnetic energy to aprojection means.

[0113] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem of producing a modulated beam of electromagnetic energy,comprising:

[0114] [a] providing a primary beam of electromagnetic energy having apredetermined range of wavelengths and randomly changing orientations ofa chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors;

[0115] [b] resolving the primary beam of electromagnetic energy into aprimary first resolved beam of electromagnetic energy havingsubstantially a first selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors and a primary secondresolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially a secondselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors;

[0116] [c] separating each of the primary resolved beams ofelectromagnetic energy into two or more separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy, each of the separate beams of electromagneticenergy having a selected predetermined orientation of a chosen componentof electromagnetic wave field vectors;

[0117] [d] altering the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of a plurality ofportions of each of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy bypassing the plurality of portions of each of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy through a respective one of a plurality ofaltering means whereby the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the separate beams of electromagneticenergy is altered in response to a stimulus means by applying a signalmeans to the stimulus means in a predetermined manner as the pluralityof portions of each of the separate beams of electromagnetic energypasses through the respective one of the plurality of means for alteringthe selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors;

[0118] [e]

[0119] [i] combining the altered separate beams of electromagneticenergy of the primary first resolved beam of electromagnetic energy intoa first single collinear beam of electromagnetic energy withoutsubstantially changing the altered selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the separate beams of electromagneticenergy, and

[0120] [ii] combining the altered separate beams of electromagneticenergy of the primary second resolved beam of electromagnetic energyinto a second single collinear beam of electromagnetic energy withoutsubstantially changing the altered selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the separate beams of electromagneticenergy; and

[0121] [f]

[0122] [i] resolving from the first single collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy a first resolved beam of electromagnetic energyhaving substantially a first selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors and a secondresolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially a secondselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors, and

[0123] [ii] resolving from the second single collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy a first resolved beam of electromagnetic energyhaving substantially a first selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors and a secondresolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially a secondselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors.

[0124] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid of producing a modulated beam of light and a beam ofultraviolet light.

[0125] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of providing includes providing asubstantially collimated primary beam of electromagnetic energy.

[0126] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of providing includes providing aprimary beam of electromagnetic energy having a rectangular crosssectional area.

[0127] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of providing includes providing aprimary initial beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially thesame selected predetermined orientation for the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors substantially across the beam.

[0128] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of resolving includes resolving theprimary beam into primary first and second resolved beams in which eachof the resolved beams of electromagnetic energy has the substantiallysame selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors substantially across each of theresolved beams of electromagnetic energy as that of the other resolvedbeams of electromagnetic energy.

[0129] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of resolving includes resolving theprimary beam into primary first and second resolved beams in which thefirst selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors has the same selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors of the second selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors.

[0130] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid further comprising the step of passing at least oneof the beams resolved from the first or second single collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy to a projection means.

[0131] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid further comprising the step of passing one of thefirst or second resolved beams of electromagnetic energy obtained fromresolving from the first single collinear beam of electromagnetic energyto a projection means and passing one of the first or second resolvedbeams of electromagnetic energy obtained from resolving from the secondsingle collinear beam of electromagnetic energy to a projection means.

[0132] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid further comprising the step of adjusting theelectromagnetic spectrum of at least one of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy. The step of adjusting the electromagnetic energymay be accomplished by adjusting the wavelengths and/or intensity of atleast one of the separated beams.

[0133] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of separating includes separatingeach of the primary resolved beams into two or more separate beams inwhich each of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy has apredetermined range of wavelengths different from the other separatebeams of electromagnetic energy.

[0134] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid further comprising the step of adjusting themagnitude of at least one of the separate beams of electromagneticenergy obtained from the step of separating each of the primary resolvedbeams of electromagnetic energy into two or more separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy.

[0135] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem of producing a collinear beam of electromagnetic energy havingtwo constituent parts, comprising:

[0136] [a] providing a primary beam of electromagnetic energy having apredetermined range of wavelengths, randomly changing orientations of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors, and asubstantially uniform flux intensity substantially across the initialbeam of electromagnetic energy;

[0137] [b] resolving the primary beam of electromagnetic energy into aprimary first resolved beam of electromagnetic energy havingsubstantially a first selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors and a primary secondresolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially a secondselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors;

[0138] [c] altering the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of a plurality ofportions of each of the primary resolved beams of electromagnetic energyby passing the plurality of portions of each of the primary resolvedbeams of electromagnetic energy through a respective one of a pluralityof altering means whereby the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the primary resolved beams ofelectromagnetic energy is altered in response to a stimulus means byapplying a signal means to the stimulus means in a predetermined manneras the plurality of portions of each of the primary resolved beams ofelectromagnetic energy passes through the respective one of theplurality of means for altering the selected predetermined orientationof the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors;

[0139] [d]

[0140] [i] resolving from the first altered primary first resolved beamof electromagnetic energy a first resolved beam of electromagneticenergy having substantially a first selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors and a secondresolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially a secondselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors, and

[0141] [ii] resolving from the second altered primary first resolvedbeam of electromagnetic energy a first resolved beam of electromagneticenergy having substantially a first selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors and a secondresolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially a secondselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors; and

[0142] [e] merging one of the resolved beams of electromagnetic energyfrom the altered primary first resolved beam of electromagnetic energywith one of the resolved beams of electromagnetic energy from the secondaltered primary resolved beam of electromagnetic energy into a firstsingle collinear beam of electromagnetic energy.

[0143] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid of producing a collinear beam of light having twoconstituent parts and a beam of ultraviolet light having two constituentparts.

[0144] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of resolving includes resolving theprimary beam into primary first and second resolved beams in which thefirst selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors has the same selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors of the second selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors.

[0145] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of resolving includes resolving theprimary beam into primary first and second resolved beams in which thefirst selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors has a selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors different from the second selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors.

[0146] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of merging includes merging saidresolved beams in which the plurality of portions of one of the mergedresolved beams has a different selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors from theplurality of portions of the other merged resolved beam.

[0147] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of merging includes merging saidresolved beams in which each merged beam has its plurality of portionsparallel and noncoincident to the plurality of portions of the othermerged beam.

[0148] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of merging includes merging saidresolved beams in which each merged beam has its plurality of portionsparallel and partially coincident to the plurality of portions of theother merged beam.

[0149] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid in which the step of merging includes merging saidresolved beams in which each merged beam has its plurality of portionsparallel and simultaneous to the plurality of portions of the othermerged beam.

[0150] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid in which the step of merging includes merging saidresolved beams in which each merged beam has its plurality of portionsparallel, noncoincident and simultaneous to the plurality of portions ofthe other merged beam.

[0151] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid in which the step of merging includes merging saidresolved beams in which each merged beam has its plurality of portionsparallel, partially coincident and simultaneous to the plurality ofportions of the other merged beam.

[0152] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid in which the step of merging includes merging saidresolved beams in which the plurality of portions of one of the mergedbeams has the substantially same selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors as the pluralityof portions of the other merged beam.

[0153] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid in which the step of merging includes merging saidresolved beams in which the plurality of portions of one of the mergedbeams has the substantially same selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors as the pluralityof portions of the other merged beam and each merged beam has itsplurality of portions parallel and noncoincident to the plurality ofportions of the other merged beam.

[0154] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid in which the step of merging includes merging saidresolved beams in which the plurality of portions of one of the mergedbeams has the substantially same selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors as the pluralityof portions of the other merged beam and each merged beam has itsplurality of portions parallel and partially coincident to the pluralityof portions of the other merged beam.

[0155] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid in which the step of merging includes merging saidresolved beams in which the plurality of portions of one of the mergedbeams has the substantially same selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors as that of theplurality of portions of the other merged beam and each merged beamhaving its plurality of portions parallel and simultaneous to theplurality of portions of the other merged beam.

[0156] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid further comprising the step of passing the firstsingle collinear beam of electromagnetic energy to a projection means.

[0157] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem of producing one or more collinear beams of electromagneticenergy, comprising:

[0158] [a] producing four or more separate beams of electromagneticenergy, each of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy having thesame selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors substantially across each beam, apredetermined range of wavelengths and a substantially uniform fluxintensity substantially across each beam of electromagnetic energy;

[0159] [b] altering the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of a plurality ofportions of each of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy bypassing the plurality of portions of each of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy through a respective one of a plurality ofaltering means whereby the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the separate beams of electromagneticenergy is altered in response to a stimulus means by applying a signalmeans to the stimulus means in a predetermined manner as the pluralityof portions of each of the separate beams of electromagnetic energypasses through the respective one of the plurality of means for alteringthe selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors;

[0160] [c]

[0161] [i] combining at least one of the altered separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy with at least one of the other altered separatebeams of electromagnetic energy into a first single collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy without substantially changing the alteredselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors of the plurality of portions of eachof the combined separate beams of electromagnetic energy, and

[0162] [ii] combining at least one of the altered separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy with at least one of the other altered separatebeams of electromagnetic energy into a second single collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy without substantially changing the alteredselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors of the plurality of portions of eachof the combined separate beams of electromagnetic energy;

[0163] [d]

[0164] [i] resolving from the first single collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy a first resolved beam of electromagnetic energyhaving substantially a first selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors and a secondresolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially a secondselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors, and

[0165] (ii] resolving from the second single collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy a first resolved beam of electromagnetic energyhaving substantially a first selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors and a secondresolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially a secondselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors; and

[0166] [e] merging one of the resolved beams of electromagnetic energyfrom the first single collinear beam of electromagnetic energy with oneof the other resolved beams of electromagnetic energy from the secondsingle collinear beam of electromagnetic energy into a third singlecollinear beam of electromagnetic energy.

[0167] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid producing one or more collinear beams of light andbeams of ultraviolet light.

[0168] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid in which the step of producing includes producingeach separate beam of electromagnetic energy further having arectangular cross sectional area.

[0169] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid further comprising the step of passing the thirdsingle collinear beam of electromagnetic energy to a projection means.

[0170] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid further comprising the step of adjusting theelectromagnetic spectrum of at least one of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy. The step of adjusting the electromagnetic energymay be accomplished by adjusting the wavelengths and/or intensity of atleast one of the separated beams.

[0171] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem of producing a modulated beam of electromagnetic energycomprising: producing an initial beam of electromagnetic energy having apredetermined range of wavelengths and having a substantially uniformflux intensity substantially across the initial beam of electromagneticenergy; separating the initial beam of electromagnetic energy into twoor more separate beams of electromagnetic energy, each of the separatebeams of electromagnetic energy having a selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors;altering the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electromagnetic wave field vectors of a plurality of portions ofeach of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy by passing theplurality of portions of each of the separate beams of electromagneticenergy through a respective one of a plurality of altering means wherebythe selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors of the plurality of portions of eachof the separate beams of electromagnetic energy is altered in responseto a stimulus means by applying a signal means to the stimulus means ina predetermined manner as the plurality of portions of each of thesubstantially separate beams of electromagnetic energy passes throughthe respective one of the plurality of means for altering the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors; combining the altered separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy into a single collinear beam of electromagneticenergy without substantially changing the altered selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors of the plurality of portions of each of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy; resolving from the single collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy a first resolved beam of electromagnetic energyhaving substantially a first selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors and a secondresolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially a secondselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors, whereby the first and secondselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors are different from one another; andaltering the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electromagnetic wave field vectors of a plurality of portions ofthe resolved beam of electromagnetic energy by passing the plurality ofportions of the resolved beam of electromagnetic energy through aaltering means whereby the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of theplurality of portions of the resolved beam of electromagnetic energy isaltered in response to a stimulus means by applying a signal means tothe stimulus means in a predetermined manner as the plurality ofportions of the resolved beam of electromagnetic energy passes throughthe plurality of means for altering the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors.

[0172] Another object of this invention is to provide a method asaforesaid of producing a modulated beam of light.

[0173] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid in which the step of producing a substantiallycollimated beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially the sameselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors and a substantially uniform fluxintensity substantially across the beam of electromagnetic energy,comprising: providing a substantially collimated beam of electromagneticenergy having a predetermined range of wavelengths; resolving from thesubstantially collimated beam of electromagnetic energy a substantiallycollimated first resolved beam of electromagnetic energy havingsubstantially a first selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors and a substantiallycollimated second resolved beam of electromagnetic energy havingsubstantially a second selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors, whereby the firstand second selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electromagnetic wave field vectors are different from one another;and forming from the substantially collimated first resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy and the substantially collimated second resolvedbeam of electromagnetic energy a substantially collimated single beam ofelectromagnetic energy having substantially the same selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors substantially across the substantially collimated singlebeam of electromagnetic energy and a substantially uniform fluxintensity substantially across the substantially collimated single beamof electromagnetic energy.

[0174] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid of producing a substantially collimated beam oflight and a beam of ultraviolet light.

[0175] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of forming includes forming thesingle beam of electromagnetic energy further having a rectangular crosssectional area.

[0176] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid further comprising the steps of resolving andforming the step of producing from the substantially collimated firstand second resolved beam of electromagnetic energy a substantiallycollimated first and second resolved beam of electromagnetic energyhaving substantially the same selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors.

[0177] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of resolving includes resolvingfrom the substantially collimated beam of electromagnetic energy asubstantially collimated first resolved beam of electromagnetic energyand substantially collimated second resolved beam of electromagneticenergy further having substantially uniform flux intensity substantiallyacross the beam of electromagnetic energy, and step [c] further includesforming the substantially collimated single beam of electromagneticenergy further having substantially the same uniform flux intensitysubstantially across the beam of electromagnetic energy as that of eachof the resolved beams of electromagnetic energy.

[0178] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid further comprising between the steps of resolvingand forming the step of producing from the substantially collimatedfirst and second resolved beam of electromagnetic energy a substantiallycollimated first and second resolved beam of electromagnetic energyhaving substantially the same selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors, whereby thesubstantially collimated first and second resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy are parallel and noncollinear.

[0179] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid further comprising the step of passing one of thesubstantially collimated resolved beams of electromagnetic energythrough a means for changing the selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors.

[0180] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of passing one of the substantiallycollimated resolved beams of electromagnetic energy through a means forchanging the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electromagnetic wave field vectors includes passing one of thesubstantially collimated resolved beams of electromagnetic energythrough a liquid crystal device for changing the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors.

[0181] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid further comprising the step of passing one of thesubstantially collimated resolved beams of electromagnetic energythrough a means for changing the selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors and changing theselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors of one of the substantiallycollimated resolved beam of electromagnetic energy to matchsubstantially the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of the othersubstantially collimated resolved beam of electromagnetic energy.

[0182] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of forming further comprises thestep of reflecting one of the substantially collimated resolved beams ofelectromagnetic energy from one or more reflecting means, each of thereflecting means having means for changing the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors.

[0183] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of reflecting one of thesubstantially collimated resolved beams of electromagnetic energy fromone or more reflecting means, each of the reflecting means having meansfor changing the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors includes reflectingone of the substantially collimated resolved beams of electromagneticenergy from one or more planar reflecting surface having a dielectriccoating, each planar reflecting surface having a dielectric coatingincluding means for changing the selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors.

[0184] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of reflecting one of thesubstantially collimated resolved beams of electromagnetic energy fromone or more reflecting means, each of the reflecting means having meansfor changing the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors includes reflectingone of the substantially collimated resolved beams of electromagneticenergy from one or more mirrors having a thin film dielectric material,each mirrors having a thin film dielectric material including means forchanging the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electromagnetic wave field vectors.

[0185] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid wherein the step of providing includes providing asubstantially collimated beam of electromagnetic energy further havingrandomly changing orientations of a chosen component of electromagneticwave field vectors.

[0186] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid further comprising the step of removing from atleast one of the beams of electromagnetic energy at least apredetermined portion of a predetermined range of wavelengths.

[0187] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid further including directing the removed portions toan absorption means.

[0188] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem of producing a modulated beam of electromagnetic energycomprising: providing an initial collimated beam of electromagneticenergy having randomly changing orientations of the selected componentof the electromagnetic wave field vectors and having a substantiallyuniform flux intensity across substantially the entire beam; resolvingfrom the initial collimated beam of electromagnetic energy an initialcollimated first resolved beam of electromagnetic energy havingsubstantially a first single selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors and aninitial collimated second resolved beam of electromagnetic energy havingsubstantially a second single selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors, whereby thefirst and second single selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors are different fromone another; forming from the initial collimated first resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy and the initial collimated second resolved beamof electromagnetic energy a substantially collimated rectangular initialsingle beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially the samesingle selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors across substantially the entire beamof electromagnetic energy and a substantially uniform flux intensityacross substantially the entire initial collimated single beam ofelectromagnetic energy; separating the collimated rectangular initialsingle beam of electromagnetic energy into two or more separatecollimated rectangular beams of electromagnetic energy whereby each ofthe separate collimated rectangular beams of electromagnetic energy hasthe same single selected predetermined orientation of a chosen componentof the electromagnetic wave field vectors as that of the other separatecollimated rectangular beams of electromagnetic energy and each separatecollimated rectangular beam of electromagnetic energy having a differentelectromagnetic energy from the other separate collimated rectangularbeams of electromagnetic energy; adjusting the electromagnetic energy byremoving at least a predetermined portion of electromagnetic energy ofat least one of the separate collimated rectangular beams ofelectromagnetic energy and directing the removed portion to a beam stopwhereby the removed portion is removed; altering the single selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors of a plurality of portions of each separatecollimated rectangular beam of electromagnetic energy by passing aplurality of portions of each separate collimated rectangular beam ofelectromagnetic energy through a respective one of a plurality ofaltering means whereby the single selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of theplurality of portions of each separate beam of electromagnetic energy isaltered in response to a stimulus means by applying a signal means tothe stimulus means in a predetermined manner as the plurality ofportions of each of the substantially collimated separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy passes through the respective one of theplurality of altering the single selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors; combiningthe altered separate collimated rectangular beams of electromagneticenergy into a single collimated rectangular collinear electromagneticenergy beam without substantially changing the altered selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors of the plurality of portions of each separatecollimated rectangular beam of electromagnetic energy; resolving fromthe single collimated rectangular collinear electromagnetic energy beama first collimated rectangular resolved electromagnetic energy beamhaving substantially a first single selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors andsecond collimated rectangular resolved electromagnetic energy beamhaving substantially a second single selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors, wherebythe first and second single selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors are differentfrom one another; and passing one of the first collimated rectangular orsecond collimated rectangular resolved electromagnetic energy beams to aprojection means.

[0189] Another object of this invention is to provide a method andsystem as aforesaid for modulating a beam of light.

[0190] One illustrative embodiment of the invention comprises: a lightsource for producing a collimated unpolarized beam of light; apolarizing beam splitter for splitting the unpolarized source beam intoseparate orthogonal linear P-polarized and S-polarized light beams; ahalf-wave retarded for converting the S-polarized light beam back to asecond polarized-polarized light beam; and an arrangement of mirrorsthat combines the P-polarized light beams into a rectangular shaped beamof a unitary polarization.

[0191] The light beam, at this point, is separated into a red componentand into a blue-green component using a first dichroic mirror selectedto reflect light having red wavelengths greater than 600 nanometers. Theblue-green component is then separated into a blue beam and a green beamusing a second dichroic mirror selected to reflect light having greenwavelengths between 500 nanometers and 600 nanometers. As an option, thered beam and the blue beam can be further filtered in order to providean optimum of color balance in visual effect and the rejected portionsof the beams that are filtered out from the red and blue can then beabsorbed. At this point, the separate red, green and blue beams arepassed through liquid crystal display devices and have their electricfield vectors altered according to the input signal. The separate redand green beams are combined into a red-green beam using a dichroicmirror selected to pass the green beam wavelengths less than 595nanometers and reflect the red beam. This red-green beam is thencombined with a separate blue beam utilizing another dichroic mirrorselected to pass the red-green beam wavelengths greater than 515nanometers and reflect the blue beam to form a collinear beam. Thiscollinear beam is then passed through a polarizer analyzer to segregatethe beam according its electric field vector. One of the segregatedbeams can be passed to an absorbing beam block. The selected segregatedmodulated polarized beam is passed onto a projection lens that projectsit onto a viewing screen. The system and method of the invention can beadapted for projecting a large image of high brightness, resolution andcontrast onto a screen.

[0192] It should be further understood that, while certain particularwavelength numbers have been given for red, blue and green, they are forillustrative purposes only and can be changed or shifted due to the typeof light source used. The changing or shifting of the particular rangeof wavelengths of the colors is due to the final color balance that isdesired.

[0193] In use of one system disclosed, collimated light from the lightsource is directed through the polarizing beam splitter. The polarizingbeam splitter separates the randomly polarized beam into a linearP-polarized beam and S-polarized beam and deflects the orthogonalpolarized beams at right angles to one another. The P-polarized beampasses through the polarizing beam splitter and is reflected through anangle of 90° by a first mirror and into the projector beam path. TheS-polarized beam exits from the polarizing beam splitter at an angle of90° to the P-polarization beam and passes through the half-waveretarder. The half-wave retarder changes the polarization of theS-polarized beam back to P-polarization. A second mirror then reflectsthis P-polarized beam through an angle of 90° onto a third and a fourthmirror. The third and fourth mirrors split the reflected P-polarizationbeam and again reflect the P-polarized light beam from the second mirrorthrough an angle of 90° and onto the LCD. The four mirrors are mountedalong an optic path with respect to one another such that the separateP-polarized beams are combined in a generally rectangular shaped beamthat corresponds to the rectangular light aperture of a LCD.

[0194] The system of the invention permits virtually all the light fromthe light source to be directed at the LCD. Moreover, the light beam atthe LCD has a shape that corresponds to the generally rectangular outerperipheral configuration of most LCDs. The advantages of the rectangularbeam allow the utilized light to strike the useful portions of the LCD,thereby not overheating the other elements surrounding the LCD causingreflection and/or heating problems.

[0195] Furthermore, another embodiment of the system of the inventiondirects a collimated source beam into a polarizer and divides the sourcebeam into a right side beam and a left side beam, each having the samedirection of polarization. The left side beam and the right side beamare then filtered into separate primary color beams (red, green andblue). Each separate primary color beam has the pixels of the respectiveportions of the beam changed in regards to the electric field vector byseparate LCDs responsive to left and right side input images. Therespective images of the right and left side primary color beams arethen combined into a single right and left side images. The left andright side images are then combined, resolved into different polarizedlight beams according to the electric field vector by a polarizeranalyzer and then one of said polarized beams is projected onto adisplay screen.

[0196] In yet another embodiment, a high resolution image is obtained bythe method and system as described above. The left side beam is offseton the display screen from the right side beam (or vice versa) by asmall amount in either the horizontal or the vertical direction (i.e.,one pixel). In this mode, the driving electronics of the liquid LCDsmust split an input image and provide that every other pixel is sent tothe right or to the left side.

[0197] In order to project a three-dimensional image, separate inputimages corresponding to the left and right eyes of the viewer (i.e.,different spatial perspectives) are input into the separate left andright side LCDs. A viewer has the choice of putting on a set of glassesover his eyes, such that the lens over the right eye is for viewingimages polarized in a first direction and the lens over the left eye isfor viewing images polarized in a different direction. The viewer willsee a three-dimensional image if the signal provided to the drivingelectronics for the left/right side provide for a different signalcorresponding to the different angular spatial mode of the left andright eye, i.e., the left side is a left side camera and the right sideis a right side camera. These separate left side or right side imagesmay also be viewed in three dimensions by a timed sequence for achievingthe 3-D effect without glasses.

[0198] As an example, the system is configured such that a viewer'sglasses contain a lens for viewing different orthogonally or differentcircularly polarized images. A left eye lens is configured for viewingP-polarized light while the right eye lens is configured for viewingS-polarized light. Alternately, as an example, the left eye lens isconfigured for viewing right circularly polarized light while the righteye lens is configured for viewing left circularly polarized light.

[0199] As an alternate example, the system is configured such that, inplace of the viewer's glasses, a polarized screen is used. This screenis formed of a transparent material that has two or more differentpolarization coatings or layers. Each coating or layer reflects acertain orientation of an electric field vector and passes all otherorientations of electric field vectors. Each successive layer or coatingis different from the other layers. This allows certain portions of theimage to be seen in depth or in actual 3-D. These types of layers orcoatings are available from OCLI. For a general discussion, see “OpticalThin Films User's Handbook”, by James D. Rancourt, McGraw-Hill Opticaland Electro-optical Engineering Series, 1987.

[0200] In alternate embodiments of the invention, 3-D high-resolution,3-D black and white or color high-resolution projectors are provided.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

[0201]FIG. 1 is an illustrative drawing of an electromagnetic wave withthe direction of propagation, electric and magnetic fields shown;

[0202]FIG. 1A is an illustrative drawing of an electromagnetic wavelooking down the axis of propagation, showing various directions ofpossible different orientations of the electric field vector forillustrative purposes;

[0203]FIG. 1B is an illustrative drawing of the resolution of anelectric field vector into two components, along an x and y axis;

[0204]FIG. 2 is a cross-section of an LCD cell as is known in the art;

[0205]FIG. 2A is a schematic drawing of an LCD component showing thepixels used in the invention;

[0206]FIG. 3 is a schematic illustration of a system for illuminating anLCD display or LCDs in a LCLV projector in accordance with anillustrative embodiment of the invention;

[0207]FIG. 3A is a schematic illustration of a system for illuminatingan LCD display or LCLV projector similar to that shown in FIG. 3 but inaccordance with an alternate embodiment of the invention;

[0208]FIG. 3B is a schematic illustration of a system for illuminatingan LCD display or LCLV projector similar to that shown in FIGS. 3 & 3Abut in accordance with a preferred embodiment of the invention for sucha display or projector;

[0209]FIG. 3C is a schematic illustration of a system for illuminatingan LCD display or LCLV projector similar to that shown in FIGS. 3, 3A &3B but in accordance with an alternate embodiment of the invention forsuch a display or projector;

[0210]FIG. 4 is a schematic of a collimated light beam from a lightsource superimposed upon a mirror used in a system constructed inaccordance with the invention;

[0211]FIG. 4A is a diagrammatic representation used in an analysis ofthe geometry of an LCD light aperture and a light beam;

[0212]FIG. 5 is a schematic showing the shape of a light beam of aunitary polarization formed in accordance with the inventionsuperimposed upon an LCD display;

[0213]FIG. 6 is an illustrative drawing showing several layers of a thinfilm coating being illuminated by a non-polarized wave source and theresulting polarized beam;

[0214]FIG. 7 is an illustrative drawing depicting a polarized beamimpinging upon a LCD cell and the resulting retardation (changing,altering, or twisting) of the electric field vector;

[0215]FIG. 8 is a diagrammatic representation of a color LCLV projectorconstructed in accordance with a preferred embodiment of the invention;

[0216]FIG. 8A is a functional illustration of FIG. 8 showing indiagrammatic form the steps involved in the method of producing amodulated beam of electromagnetic energy for use in a color LCLVprojector;

[0217]FIG. 8B is a schematic illustration of a preferred embodiment of asystem for a LCLV projector in accordance with the invention usingunequal light pathways from the light source to the LCDs and a dichroicbeam combiner;

[0218]FIG. 8C is a schematic illustration of a preferred embodiment of asystem for an LCLV projector in accordance with the invention usingequal light pathways from the light to the LCDs and equal light pathwaysfrom the LCDs to the projection lens;

[0219]FIG. 8D is a schematic illustration of a preferred embodiment of asystem for a LCLV projector in accordance with the invention usingunequal light pathways from the light source to the LCDs and a dichroicbeam splitter and combiner;

[0220]FIG. 8E is a schematic illustration of a preferred embodiment of asystem for an LCLV projector in accordance with the invention using adichroic beam combiner and using individual separated light sources suchas rectangular linear arrays of laser diodes, LEDs, fluorescent flatplates, or neon flat plates;

[0221]FIG. 8F is a schematic illustration of a preferred embodiment of asystem for an LCLV projector in accordance with the invention using aseparated dichroic mirror means for beam combination and usingindividual separated light sources such as rectangular linear arrays,laser diodes, LEDs, fluorescent flat plates, or neon flat plates;

[0222]FIG. 8G is a schematic illustration of a preferred embodiment of asystem for an LCLV projector in accordance with the invention using aseparated dichroic mirror means for beam combination and usingindividual separated light sources such as single light sources such asargon ion lasers or high intensity white lights;

[0223]FIG. 9 is a graph showing the spectral characteristics of commonlyused optical sources;

[0224]FIG. 9A is a table showing the performance data of common opticalsources;

[0225]FIG. 10 is a graph illustrating the scotopic and photopic responsecharacteristics for the human eye of visible light;

[0226]FIG. 10A is an illustration showing the CIE color diagram;

[0227]FIG. 10B is the same as FIG. 10A but shows the different colorsgiven to the various regions;

[0228]FIG. 11 is a graph showing a wavelength response of polarizingcube component used in an illustrative embodiment of the invention;

[0229]FIG. 12 is a graph of the transmissive and reflectivecharacteristics of a mirror (33) used in an illustrative embodiment ofthe invention for separating an infrared component of a source beam;

[0230]FIG. 13 is a graph of the transmissive and reflectivecharacteristics of a mirror (35) used in an illustrative embodiment ofthe invention for separating an ultraviolet component of the sourcebeam;

[0231]FIG. 14 is a graph of the transmissive and reflectivecharacteristics of mirrors (80 & 82) used in an illustrative embodimentof the invention for separating and further filtering a red lightcomponent of the source beam;

[0232]FIG. 15 is a graph of the reflective and transmissivecharacteristics of mirror (90) used in an illustrative embodiment of theinvention for combining an altered blue beam and an altered red-greenbeam;

[0233]FIG. 16 is an analysis of the reflective and transmissivecharacteristics of mirror (92) used in an illustrative embodiment of theinvention for combining an altered red beam and an altered green beam;

[0234]FIG. 17 is an analysis of the reflective and transmissivecharacteristics of mirrors (86 & 88) used in an illustrative embodimentof the invention for further filtering a blue beam;

[0235]FIG. 18 is an analysis of the reflective and transmissivecharacteristics of a mirror (84) used in an illustrative embodiment ofthe invention for further filtering a blue beam;

[0236]FIG. 19 is a schematic flow diagram of a color LCLV projectorconstructed in accordance with an illustrative embodiment of theinvention;

[0237]FIG. 20 is a diagrammatic representation of a 3-D color LCLVprojector constructed in accordance with a preferred embodiment of theinvention;

[0238]FIG. 20A is a diagrammatic representation of a 3-D color LCLVprojector constructed in accordance with a preferred alternateembodiment of the invention using an additional quarter-wave retarder;

[0239]FIG. 20B is a diagrammatic representation of a 3-D color LCLVprojector constructed in accordance with another alternate embodiment ofthe invention for use with circular polarization viewing lenses;

[0240]FIG. 20C is a schematic illustration of a preferred embodiment ofa system for a dual beam LCLV projector suitable for 3-D, highbrightness or high resolution in accordance with the invention using adichroic beam combiner and using individual separated light sources suchas rectangular linear arrays of laser diodes or LEDs;

[0241]FIG. 20D is a schematic illustration of an alternative embodimentfor a dual beam LCLV projector suitable for 3-D, high brightness or highresolution in accordance with the invention using beam combiners andusing individual separated light sources such as rectangular lineararrays of laser diodes or LEDs and further using a LCD device as avariable retarder on the output beam;

[0242]FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of a two camera projector methodfor use with an illustrative embodiment of a 3-D projector constructedin accordance with the invention;

[0243]FIG. 22 is a preferred embodiment of a diagrammatic representationof a high resolution or three-dimensional black and white liquid crystalLCLV projector constructed in accordance with the invention;

[0244]FIG. 22A is a diagrammatic representation of a preferred alternateembodiment high resolution or three-dimensional LCLV projectorconstructed in accordance with the invention using a quarter-waveretarder;

[0245]FIG. 23 is a schematic illustration of a preferred embodiment of asystem for using a device as a 3-D screen or 3-D viewing cube;

[0246]FIG. 24 is a schematic illustration of a preferred embodiment of asystem for producing fluorescent lighting via a flat plate arrangement;

[0247]FIG. 24A is a perspective view of the device in FIG. 24;

[0248]FIG. 25 is an illustration of a preferred embodiment of a systemfor producing a linear matrix array of laser diodes for use in FIGS. 8E,8F, 20C & 20D;

[0249]FIG. 26 is a table of the characteristics of mirrors used in thisinvention;

[0250]FIG. 27 is a preferred embodiment of an illustrative drawing of asystem for producing a collimated beam of light known as an opticalintegrator;

[0251]FIG. 27A is a preferred embodiment of an illustrative drawing of asingle light pipe of the optical integrator for producing a collimatedbeam of light, and also shows the optical path of light rays through it;

[0252]FIG. 27B is a preferred embodiment of an illustrative drawing of afly-eye arrangement of the light pipes in the optical integrator shapedin a rectangular shape and with the light pipes made in a square shape;

[0253]FIG. 27C is a preferred embodiment of an illustrative drawing of afly-eye arrangement of the light pipes in the optical integrator shapedin a circular shape and with the light pipes made in a circular shape;and

[0254]FIG. 28 is a preferred embodiment of an illustrative drawing of asystem for producing a collimated beam of light including a lightsource, a first and second reflecting means, a light integrator meansand a collimating means.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

[0255] For purposes of simplicity, the same number has been used in thevarious figures to identify the same part.

[0256] Light Path and Rectangular Beam

[0257] Referring now to FIG. 3, a collimated light beam 50 from a lightsource 32 is converted into a unitary polarized beam 30 having across-sectional configuration or shape (see FIG. 5) that matches anouter peripheral cross-sectional configuration or shape of the LCDdisplay 34. As an example, the LCD 34 display is a LCD having a lightaperture of a generally rectangular outer peripheral configuration.

[0258] This aspect of the invention includes in an optically alignedpath: a polarizing beam splitter 36, a half-wave retarder 38, and anarrangement of a first mirror 40, a second mirror 42, a third mirror 44,and a fourth mirror 46, that combine the separate beams exiting from thepolarizing beam splitter 36 into a combined beam of single polarization30 having a cross sectional configuration or shape that matches thecross sectional shape of the LCD display 34. Suitable color filters 48may be placed between the LCD display 34 and the combined beam.

[0259] The manner in which the collimated beam 50 is formed is nowdescribed. Light source 32 and reflecting optics or means 41 produce anunpolarized beam of light 50 which is then collimated by collimationoptics, such as lens 43 or light integrator means 63, as shown in FIG.27.

[0260] The light or optical integrator means is made of a plurality oflight pipes such as those shown in FIG. 27A, each light pipe beingadjacent and in contact with one or more other light pipes. Each lightpipe consists of a first lens surface 45, a body 75, and a second lenssurface 71. A light source 31 emits rays 73 towards the surface of body75 which is ground to the predetermined shape required. This first lenssurface 45 functions to bend light rays 73 towards a more collimatedalignment one to the other. Body 75 carries the light rays to the secondlens surf ace 71 and has the same index of refraction as the first lenssurface 45 and second lens surface 71. This minimizes the number ofinterfaces the light ray 73 must pass through. Continuing on, light ray73 strikes the second lens surface 71 which is ground to a predeterminedshape, and is again bent more normal; thus, the light rays exitingsurface 71 are substantially collimated. Lens surfaces 45 and 71 may ormay not be of the same shape or form and are dependent upon severalfactors, including, but not limited to, the size of the light source,the shape of the light source, the type of light source, the distancefrom the light source to the first lens surface 45, the length and sizeof body 75, the distance of the integrator second lens surface 71 to thetarget, and other factors known in the trade.

[0261] Referring again to FIG. 3, alternately, the light source 32 andits reflecting optics or means 41 form an unpolarized collimated beam oflight 50. The unpolarized collimated beam of light 50 is split by thepolarizing beam splitter 36 into separate orthogonal polarized beams, aP-polarized beam 52, and an S-polarized beam 54. The P-polarized beampasses through the polarizing beam splitter 36 and is directed onto thefirst mirror 40 and reflected through an angle of 90° as a reflectedbeam 53 and onto the LCD display 34. The S-polarized beam 54 isdeflected by the polarizing beam splitter 36 through an angle of 90° andis passed through the half-wave retarder 38. The half-wave retarder 38changes the orientation of the electric field vector of the S-polarizedbeam 54 to form a second P-polarized beam 56. This second P-polarizedbeam 56 is reflected through an angle of 90° by the second mirror 42.The third mirror 44 and fourth mirror 46 are situated to intercept thereflected second P-polarized beam 56 and split the beam into twoseparate reflected beams 58 and 60 emanating in the same direction asreflected beam 53. The three separate reflected beams 53, 58, and 60 arethen combined (see FIG. 5) into a single beam 30 having a singleorientation of the electric field vector (P-polarized) and is directedthrough suitable color filters 48 to the LCD display 34.

[0262] With reference to FIG. 4, each mirror such as first mirror 40,may be configured with a preferred geometrical shape such as a generallyrectangular or square (i.e., a square shape is a subset of a rectangularshape) outer peripheral configuration to intercept a generally circularshaped or collimated light beam (i.e. 52) such that the reflected beam(i.e., 53) from the mirror is also of a square or rectangularconfiguration. This arrangement will produce a reflected beam that isgeometrically similar to the sizes and shapes of the mirrors used, asthe geometry of the mirrors will be duplicated by the reflected beams.As shown in FIG. 5, this allows a square-shaped reflected beam 53 from afirst mirror 40, a rectangular shaped reflected beam 60 from fourthmirror 46, and a rectangular shape reflected beam 58 from third mirror44 to be aligned to produce a unitary beam at the LCD display 34 havinga generally rectangular outer peripheral configuration. This rectangularconfiguration of the unitary beam 30 matches the rectangular outerperipheral configuration of the LCD display 34 and in particular to thelight aperture of the LCD display 34.

[0263] The method and system for the invention with reference to FIGS. 3& 4 can be summarized as follows: producing an unpolarized collimatedbeam of light 50 with a light source 32; splitting the unpolarized beamof light 50 with a polarizing beam splitter 36 into separate orthogonalpolarized beams 52, 54 (i.e., a first P-polarized beam 52 and anS-polarized beam 54); directing a first orthogonal beam 52 (firstP-polarized beam 52) onto a first mirror 40 to produce a first reflectedbeam 53; directing the second orthogonal beam 54 (S-polarized beam 54)through a half-wave retarder 38 in order to convert the direction ofpolarization of the second orthogonal beam 54 (S-polarized beam) tobecome a second reflected beam 56 having the same polarization as thefirst orthogonal beam 52 (a second P-polarized beam); directing thesecond orthogonal beam 56 (second P-polarized beam) onto a second mirror42 and reflecting the beam through an angle of 90°; directing the secondreflected beam 56 onto third and fourth mirrors 44, 46 that reflect thesecond reflected beam 56 through a second 90° angle and split the secondreflected beam 56 into a third reflected beam 58 and a fourth reflectedbeam 60; and combining the separate reflected beams, i.e., firstreflected (P-polarized) beam 53, third reflected (P-polarized) beam 58and fourth reflected (P-polarized) beam 60, into a unitary beam 30 of asingle polarization and having a rectangular outer peripheral shape thatmatches the rectangular outer peripheral shape of an LCD display 34.

[0264] Mirrors 40, 42, 44, 46 or other reflecting means are to bealigned to intersect the path of the orthogonal light beams 52, 56 toproduce a unitary light beam by the combination of separate reflectedbeams 53, 58, 60 at the LCD display 34. FIG. 3 illustrates just one suchalignment pattern for the mirrors 40, 42, 44, 46 with their planarsurfaces. In the embodiment illustrated by FIG. 3, third mirror 44 andfourth mirror 46 are located on either side of first mirror 40. FIG. 3Aillustrates another possible alignment of the mirrors 40, 44 and 46 tointersect the path of the orthogonal light beams 52, 56. In theembodiment of FIG. 3A, the third mirror 44 and fourth mirror 46 are bothaligned on one side of the first mirror 40. However the resultantunitary beam at the LCD display 34 is functionally the same.Arrangements of the mirrors 40, 44, 46 other than those shown in FIGS.3, 3A, & 3C are also possible. The arrangement of mirrors in FIGS. 3A &3B are the same. Moreover, the mirrors 40, 44, 46 may be shaped andarranged to produce a square shaped beam at the LCD display 34.

[0265] Beam 30 allows substantially of the light produced by the lightsource 32 to be utilized for illuminating the LCD display 34 taking intoconsideration the form factor of the light source as shown in FIG. 4Aand described below. With beam 30, the minimal number of components(i.e., polarizing beam splitter 36, half-wave retarder 38, mirrors 40,42, 44, 46) allow these components to be easily adjusted to achieve aresultant unitary beam at the LCD display 34 that is of the desiredshape and of a single polarization (i.e., single orientation of theelectric field vector). The polarization of the resultant beam in theillustrative embodiments is in a P-polarized direction. Alternately, thebeam 30 can be configured to produce an S-polarized beam at the LCDdisplay 34, or whatever else predetermined polarization direction ischosen.

[0266] In addition, the half-wave retarder 38 may be rotated to tune thepolarization of the resultant beam 56 exiting from the half-waveretarder 38 to exactly match the polarization of the first P-polarizedbeam 52 exiting the polarizing beam splitter 36. Additionally, thepositions of the mirrors (40, 42, 44, 46) may be easily adjusted orrearranged to achieve a predetermined resultant beam of a desire outerperipheral configuration at the LCD display 34.

[0267] In FIG. 3B, half-wave retardation of the beam is realized bymeans other than the half-wave retarder 38 as used in FIG. 3A. This isaccomplished by reflecting the beam 54 (S-polarized) from the secondmirror 42, resulting in a quarter-wave retardation. Each half of thebeam is then reflected from the respective mirrors 44, 46 and furtherretarded by a quarter-wave. This results in half-wave retardation ofS-polarized beam 54 changing it into P-polarized beams 58, 60. Thesystem shown in FIG. 3B is preferred to those systems shown in FIGS. 3 &3A because less components are required. Such mirrors are available fromOCLI Corporation, Santa Rosa, Calif. as part numbers 777-QWM001, through777-QWM002.

[0268] The mirrors 42, 44, 46 as shown in FIG. 3B can be constructedwith a coating formed thereon through thin film coating techniques. Eachmirror 42, 44, 46 can act as a quarter wave retarder, besides being abroadband reflector.

[0269] Thin film coatings are also referred to as dielectric films,i.e., they are films made of materials composed of atoms whose electronsare so tightly bound to the atomic nuclei that electric currents arenegligible even under applied high electric fields. The individual filmthicknesses or layers vary over a very broad range, but they arereferred to as a thin film when the thickness of the film is on theorder of that wavelength. These films are built up in many layers, oneon top of another, and are referred to as a multilayer thin film, asschematically illustrated in FIG. 6. Each layer then reflects theappropriate wavelength or orientation of the electric field vectoraccording to its individually designed construction. These layers aretypically deposited on top of a receiving substrate by vacuumdeposition. This includes vaporizing a material and causing the vaporatoms to strike the substrate in a predetermined manner and rate. Sometypical materials are MgF₂ SiO₂ Al₂O₃ C (diamond), ZnS, TiO₂, CdS, CdTe,GaAs, Ge, Si, Ag, Au, PbS, along with many other materials.

[0270] Because dielectric materials are used, the index of refractionfor each layer is different from each adjacent layer, although in somecases they might be the same.

[0271] Light is reflected from, and transmitted through each layer (seeFIG. 6) and interface. These light wave fields that are transmitted andreflected from each interface interact with one another. Depending uponthe material chosen for the thin film and the optical thickness of thethin film, different results are achieved. A device made in this fashioncan have from one to several hundred film layers on a substrate. In oneinstance, by proper design, a coating can change the phase of incidentlinearly polarized light. In effect, this functions as a relativequarter wave plate. Several papers on this subject have been published,but in particular: “Phase Retardance of Periodic Multilayer Mirrors,”Appl. Opt., 21 (4):733 (1982), Joseph H. Appl, “Graphical Method toDesign internal Reflection Phase Retarders,” Appl. Opt., 23(8):1178(1984), “Mulitlayer Coating Design Achieving a Broadband 90° PhaseShift”, Appl. Opt., 19(16):2688, (1980), William H. Southwell.

[0272] In another design, the coating reflects the incident polarizedlight wave, and thus reinforces the P-polarized reflection. This designreflects the entire light spectrum and functions as a broadband mirror.

[0273] The components of the system producing unitary beam 30 may befabricated from commercially available parts. Light source 32 can be anysuitable lamp such as a short arc lamp, a quartz-halogen lamp, a mercuryvapor/xenon long arc lamp, etc. In general, such lamps efficientlyproduce a high intensity point source of light. They are available invarious sizes and with varying spectral qualities. Suitable commercialembodiments of high brightness light sources (greater than 15,000lumens) are manufactured by many manufacturers, including but notlimited to Optical Radiation Corporation, Azusa, Calif. Other lightsources that produce desired wavelengths and different output lumens(spectra or spectrum distribution) may also be utilized as shown in FIG.9A. Most light sources contain a spectrum of visible, infrared, andultraviolet light that are contained in different proportions respectiveto each other. Lasers can also be used as light sources.

[0274] Polarizing beam splitter 36 may be any of the known devices. Itmay be, for example, composed of a dielectric thin film stack disposedon a suitable substrate (such as glass). The stack may be fabricated byalternating layers of high and low refractive index films each with aquarterwave optical thickness, with the center of the wavelength designfor visible light at approximately 550 nanometers. At each film/filminterface, light is incident at Brewsters angle which transmitsP-polarized light and reflects S-polarized light. The number of layersare dependent upon the final outcome desired, and can be tailored forthe cost/performance tradeoff desired. It may be fashioned in the shapeof a cube of glass with the layers deposited on the diagonal, oralternatively, the multilayers can be deposited on a piece of glass, andoptionally, another piece of glass can then be cemented to the front,forming a sandwich of which the multilayers are deposed in between thetwo pieces of glass. The purpose of this is to protect the layer stackfrom abrasion or contact with the air. The arrangement of a single pieceof glass or two pieces of glass would yield a polarizing beam splitterthat is less costly to produce and weigh less than a cube polarizer.

[0275] It is desirable that the light striking the surface of the layersdo so at a 45° angle, with a small deviation from the normal of therays, thus the incidence angle between the layers and the beam of lightshould be well controlled. Such a polarizing beam splitter is describedin U.S. Pat. No. 2,403,731 to MacNeille or U.S. Pat. No. 2,449,287 toFlood and is termed a MacNeille polarizer. A commercial embodiment ofsuch a polarizing beam splitter suitable for use herein can be obtainedfrom the Perkin Elmer Corporation, Electro-Optical Division, Norwalk,Conn. or OCLI Corporation, Santa Rosa, Calif. A wavelength response fora polarizing beam splitter is shown in FIG. 10.

[0276] Typically, such coatings of thin film stacks on the diagonal ofthe polarizers and polarizing beam splitters can be coatings capable ofhandling high energy beams such as laser beams. They are capable ofhandling high wattage of incident energy per centimeter squared.

[0277] The mirror 40 (OCLI Corporation, Santa Rosa, Calif., part no.777BEM001) must be selected to be an efficient reflector of theP-polarized light at the particular wavelength required. Mirrors 42, 44,46 are selected to be either quarter wave retarders or broadbandreflective mirrors, depending upon how the system is configured. If usedas a quarter wave mirror, their part numbers are 777QWM001 and777-QWM002. if used as a broadband mirror, their part numbers are777-BBM002 and 777-BBM003. These mirror numbers are available from OCLICorporation, Santa Rosa, Calif. As an example, the mirrors can be formedof a thin film coated onto a substrate. The thin film is formed with abroadband coating for visible light. It is known that metal film mirrorsreflect P-polarized waves more efficiently than S-polarized wavesbecause of the nature of metal reflections. Because of this knownefficiency factor, the conversion of S-polarized waves to P-polarized isutilized by this invention.

[0278] Such thin film mirrors that are acceptable for use herein can beobtained from the OCLI Corporation, Santa Rosa, Calif. Thin filmcoatings are known as laser coatings and are capable of handling highenergy beams (watts divided by centimeters squared).

[0279] The half-wave retarder 38 (shown in FIG. 3A) maybe one of a classof optical elements known as retarders, which serve to change thepolarization of an incident wave. With a retarder, the light exiting hasthe orientation of the electric field vector lagged in phase behind theinput light by a predetermined amount. Upon emerging from the retarder,the relative phase is different than it was initially and thus thepolarization state (orientation of the electric field vector) isdifferent as well. A retardation plate that introduces a relative phasedifference of 90° is known as a half-wave retarder.

[0280] A half-wave retarder can be made from a biaxial crystal materialsuch as mica. Suitable retarders can also be made from sheets of plasticmaterial that have been stretched to align long chain organic molecules,thin film dielectrics (such as that made by OCLI Corporation, SantaRosa, Calif.), LCDs, reflection from mirrors coated with a thin filmdielectric, a combination of a LCD and a mirror coated with a thin filmdielectric, and quartz crystal. The half-wave retarder 38 used in theillustrative embodiment of the invention can preferably be adjusted(i.e., by rotation of the crystal) to exactly match the polarizationstate of a P-polarized light beam 56 exiting the retarder 38 (see FIG.3A) with the P-polarization state of P-polarized light beam 52 exitingthe polarizer cube 36. Other means of changing or converting thepolarization direction of a light beam other than a half-wave retardercan be employed in this application.

[0281] By way of example and not limitation, a system and methodconstructed in accordance with the invention offers the followingresults and advantages over prior art illumination systems: arectangular singularity polarized beam is created that will efficientlyfill the aperture of an LCD display; and the divergence of the resultantbeam at the LCD display is smaller than with other methods ofcombination, i.e., U.S. Pat. No. 4,913,529 to Goldenberg.

[0282] Light Projector

[0283] Referring now to FIG. 8, a projector constructed in accordancewith an illustrative embodiment of the invention is shown. FIG. 8 islabeled with locative directions illustrating an optic path forconvenience sake only and does not necessarily resemble what the actuallayout may be. Other arrangements of the illustrative componentsconnected in different optic paths may also be suitable.

[0284] A light source 32 (i.e., a xenon short arc lamp, a quartz-halogenlamp, a mercury vapor/xenon long arm lamp, etc.) emits light which iscollimated into a source beam 50 traveling toward the left that containsa wavelength spectrum of visible, infrared and ultraviolet light. (Mostlight sources contain all of the above wavelengths of light; however,they are contained in different proportions respective to each other.See FIGS. 9 & 9A for different types of light sources). Depending on theapplication, the lamp source can be any suitable means for producing acollimated beam of light. The characteristics of the light source may betailored to a particular application.

[0285] The visible region of light that a typical person can see isbetween 400 and 700 nanometers in wavelength (this is well understoodand can be found in standard reference books or college level text books(see also photopic response curve in FIG. 10). The non-visiblewavelengths between 200 nanometers to 400 nanometers are named theultraviolet region and the non-visible wavelengths between 700nanometers and 1500 nanometers are named the infrared region.

[0286] The infrared wavelength region (greater than 700 nanometers) andthe ultraviolet wavelength region (less than 400 nanometers) eachcontribute watts of radiant light energy which are detrimental to theoptics of the system but does not contribute to normal human eyesight(see photopic response curves in FIG. 10). Because of this fact, thecollimated source beam 50 from the light source 32 is directed to theleft toward mirror 33 which is a dichroic/thin film dielectric mirror.Dichroic/thin film dielectric mirrors are able to function as wavelengthfilters. In general, these type of mirrors are constructed to transmit(i.e., pass through) all light having wavelengths longer (or shorter)than a reference wavelength and reflect the non-transmitted light. Thereflective and transmissive characteristics of mirror 33 are shown inFIG. 12.

[0287] The light wavelengths less than 700 nanometers which strike thecoating on the front surface are reflected downward (as viewed in FIG.8) by an angle of 90° toward mirror 35. The infrared portions 141 of thesource beam 50 (wavelengths greater than 700 nanometers) are transmittedthrough mirror 33 and strike a beam block absorber shown schematicallyas 161. The beam block absorber 161 can be constructed of a black pieceof aluminum (preferably with fins to radiate the heat, not shown) thatabsorbs the infrared wavelengths from the source beam 50 and re-emitsthe absorbed energy as heat, which can be carried away from the systemand not introduced into the vital components which it might otherwisestrike. Alternately, in place of a black piece of aluminum, othersuitable means for absorbing infrared wavelengths may be utilized.Additionally, suitable means of separating or filtering the infraredcomponent of the source beam 50 other than dichroic/thin film mirror 33may be utilized.

[0288] The remaining wavelengths of the source beam 50 resulting in anew source beam 55 are reflected from mirror 33 downward (as viewed inFIG. 8) by an angle of 90° and strike the front surface of mirror 35. Aswith mirror 33, mirror 35 is formed as a wavelength filter so that thevisible portion (430-700 nanometers in wavelength, see FIG. 13A) of thesource beam 55 resulting in a new source beam 57 is transmitted toward apolarizer cube 36 located in an optic path with mirror 35. Theultraviolet portion 37 of the source beam 55 (wavelengths less than 439nanometers) is reflected by an angle of 90° toward the beam blockabsorber 161 on the left. (The characteristics of the mirrors 33 and 35are outlined in FIGS. 12 & 13. Alternately, in place of dichroic/thinfilm mirror 35 and beam block absorber 161, other means for separatingand absorbing the ultraviolet components of the source beam may beprovided.

[0289] The source beam 57 is next directed toward a means 36 forpolarizing the source beam 57 into two orthogonally polarized beams. Inthe illustrative embodiment in FIG. 8 of the invention, a polarizer cube36 is utilized to separate the source beam 57 into a P-polarized beam 52and an S-polarized beam 54. It should be further understood that when apolarizer cube is mentioned, that a polarizing plate or a piece of glasswith a thin film polarizing coating deposited upon it, or a sandwich ofglass, with the thin film polarizing layers deposed in between theglasses, can also be used for construction of the system.

[0290] A suitable polarizer cube 36, in an illustrative embodiment ofthe invention, is known in the art as a birefringent polarizer. Inparticular, one useful for this application is called a MacNeillePolarizer and is described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 2,403,731 and 2,449,287,with a general discussion having previously been set forth above.

[0291] The polarizer 36, if constructed as a thin film Macneillepolarizer, is sensitive to ultraviolet and infrared portions of thelight spectrum because of the thin film coatings; thus, the wavelengthfiltering by mirrors 33 and 35 that occurs before the beam enters thepolarizer cube 36 is advantageous. This is because the ultraviolet lightcauses degradation of the internal coatings and the infrared lightcauses excessive heat buildup in the polarizer 36. The polarizercoatings start to absorb energy below 425 nanometer which will destroytheir effectiveness. (see FIG. 11 for wavelength response of a suitablepolarizer cube 36). The polarizer 36 polarizes the source beam 57 intotwo orthogonally polarized beams, beam 52 and beam 54, of equalcross-sectional areas but with different polarizations. The P-polarizedbeam 52 is propagated straight through to strike mirror 40 where it isdeflected by a 90° angle toward the left. The other polarizationcomponent of the source beam cube 36, the S portion of the source beam,i.e., beam 54, is deflected left through a 45° angle from the diagonalplane of the polarizing coating of the polarizer cube 36. ThisS-polarized beam 54 is converted or changed into a P-polarizationdirection by a suitable polarization converter such as a half-wavepolarization retarder 38, or, alternately, by reflections from coatedmirrors 42, 44, and 46.

[0292] A general discussion of half-wave retarder 38 requirements andspecifications or reflections from mirrors 42, 44, 46 have beenpreviously furnished above.

[0293] The half-wave retarder 38 thus produces a second P-polarized beam56. Second P-polarized beam 56 strikes mirror 42 and it is deflected bya 90° angle downward where it is deflected toward the left by mirrors 44and 46. Mirrors 40, 42, 44 and 46 are front surfaced broadband mirrorsthat will maintain the P-polarization of the beam. Moreover, thereflective surfaces of these mirrors 40, 42, 44 and 46 can be generallyrectangular in shape such that the beams reflected therefrom are alsogenerally rectangular in shape. This allows a resultant unitarypolarized beam to be formed with a generally rectangular outerperipheral configuration to match the light aperture of an LCD. Theresultant unitary polarized beam 30 is thus doubled in its original sizeand has the same rectangular area of the LCDs that it is going to strikeand is of one state of polarization, that is, a P-polarization.

[0294] Alternately, in place of the polarizer cube 36, any othersuitable means for producing orthogonally polarized beams (52, 54) canbe utilized. Additionally, means for converting (or changing) thepolarization of one of the beams 54 other than the half-wave retarder 38can be provided, such as reflection from coated mirrors 42, 44, 46.Moreover, other means than mirrors 40, 42, 44, 46 for combining thepolarized beams 52 and 56 can be utilized. Finally the mirrors 40, 42,44 and 46 can be placed in other arrangements for producing a resultantunitary polarized beam 30 having a shape that matches the rectangularperipheral shape of an LCD or LCD light aperture.

[0295] The rectangular polarized light beam 30 now encounters thecoating surface of mirror 80 (which functions as a filtering means)where it is split into two beams 132, 134; beam 132 is deflected upward(as viewed in FIG. 8) at an angle of 90° and beam 134 continues onthrough 80 to the left. Deflected beam 132, traveling upward, is a beamcontaining wavelengths between 600 nanometers and 700 nanometers (thered portion of the visible spectrum) or, alternately, otherpredetermined portions of the light spectrum, and of the P-polarizationstate. At this time, the beam 132 strikes mirror 82 which functions as asecond filtering means. FIG. 14 illustrates the reflectancecharacteristics of mirrors 80 and 82. As is apparent, these mirrors areselected to reflect the red portion of the visible spectrum and to allowwavelengths of less than 600 nanometers or, alternately, otherpredetermined portions of the light spectrum to pass through. Mirror 82further filters the deflected beam 132 so that it will match the CIEresponse needed for a good color balance (see FIGS. 10A & 10B). As anexample, the mirror curve (FIG. 14) of mirror 82 can be shifted towardthe right so that it will pass wavelengths below 615 nanometers or,alternately, other predetermined portions of the light spectrum andcause a deflected beam to appear deeper red to the human eye. Any“unwanted” wavelengths will pass through 82 and strike a red beam block136 while the wanted wavelengths are deflected at an angle of 90° towardthe left where they pass through a first LCD, which is termed as a redLCD 138. Beam block 136 can be fabricated in the same manner as beamblock absorber 161 previously described.

[0296] The red LCD 138 (as well as a green LCD 140 and a blue LCD 142 tofollow) is of a type that can be caused to change its birefringence,thereby altering the orientation of the electric field vector of lightpassing through it, formed in a checkerboard arrangement with individualpixels 100 (see FIG. 2A). The red LCD 138 is driven by electronics inwhich each cell alters the respective light portion by rotating thevector of the electric field according to the image that is desired tobe displayed (change by “twisting” or rotating the polarization state,see FIG. 2A, by application of a voltage). The resolution of theprojected image will depend upon the number of cells in the LCD. Adisplay of 320 horizontal pixels by 240 vertical pixels will yield adisplay of 76,800 pixels. A typical television set is 115,000 pixels.Thus, the deflected red beam 132, having now passed through the red LCD138, is now an altered red beam 144 comprising a combination ofpolarizations for the individual pixels of a display, each pixel havinga predetermined orientation of electric field vector by the drivingelectronics. As will hereinafter be more fully explained, the amount ofthe rotation in the polarization state for an individual pixel willeventually decide how much of the light for that pixel will be passedall the way through to finally strike the screen used for display. Atthis point, the altered red beam 144 strikes mirror 92 and is deflectedupward at an angle of 90°. The purpose of mirror 92 is to combine thealtered red beam 144 and altered green beam 152 (as viewed in FIG. 8).Mirror 92 thus functions as a combining means. The response curve formirror 92 is shown in FIG. 16. It is best that mirror 92 does not changethe state of polarization of the altered red beam 144 or any other beamstriking it (i.e., altered green beam 152).

[0297] The deflected (from mirror 92) altered red beam 144 thencontinues on through mirror 90 which is constructed to pass anywavelengths greater than 515 nanometers (see FIG. 17) or, alternately,other predetermined portions of the light spectrum. The purpose ofmirror 90 is to combine the combined altered red 144 and altered green152 beams with an altered blue beam 160. Mirror 90 thus also functionsas a combining means. It is best that mirror 90 does not change thestate of polarization (orientation of the electric field vector) of anybeam impingent upon it. The altered red beam 144 after passing throughmirror 90 will continue on to a final polarizer called the polarizeranalyzer 146. Polarizer analyzer 146 may also be a polarizer cubeconstructed as a MacNeille polarizer, or alternatively, as describedabove, on a single piece of glass or sandwiched between two pieces ofglass. The vector component of the individual pixel light beams that isa P orientation of the electric field vector will pass through thepolarizer analyzer 146 into a projection lens 148 and be projected as apart of beam 178 toward a screen (not shown in FIG. 8) according to themagnification of the projection lens 148. The vector component of thealtered red beam 144 that is not a P vector component (S-polarization)will be deflected by the polarizer analyzer 146 toward the left and beabsorbed by beam block 150. See FIG. 1B for a pictorial illustrationshowing how a particular vector component is resolved into twocomponents, each having a different orientation of the electric fieldvector. Beam block 150 may be fabricated in the same manner as beamblock absorber 161 previously described. Thus, the intensity of the redlight at the viewing surface is directly proportional to the amount ofrotation of the altered red beam's electric field vector.

[0298] Returning now to the single state of polarization rectangularlight beam 30, it encounters the coating of mirror 80 where it is splitinto two beams 132, 134. A red beam 132 is deflected upward and theother beam, blue-green beam 134, passes through mirror 80 and continueson to the left. The blue-green beam 134 traveling through mirror 80 andtoward the left is a beam containing wavelengths between 415 nanometersand 600 nanometers (the blue-green portion of the visible spectrum) or,alternately, other predetermined portions of the light spectrum, and ofthe P-polarization state. The response curve for mirror 80 is shown inFIG. 14. Next, the blue-green beam 134 strikes the surface coating ofmirror 84 and the green portion 154 of the beam (500-600 nanometers or,alternately, other predetermined portions of the light spectrum) isdeflected by a 90° angle upward toward the green LCD 140, while the blueportion 156 of the beam (425-500 nanometers or, alternately, otherpredetermined portions of the light spectrum) continues on throughmirror 84 and toward mirror 86 at the left. Mirror 84 functions as afiltering means, and its response curve is shown in FIG. 18.

[0299] The green beam 154 passes through the green LCD 140. Each cellalters its respective portion of the green beam by rotating theorientation of the vector of the electric field according to the imagethat is desired to be displayed. Thus, the altered green beam 152,having now passed through the green LCD 140, is an altered green beam152 comprising of a combination of polarizations for the individualpixels of a display, each pixel having a predetermined orientation ofelectric field vector by the driving electronics. The amount of therotation in the polarization state for an individual pixel willeventually decide how much of the light for that pixel will be passedall the way through the polarizer analyzer 146 to finally strike thescreen (not shown in FIG. 8) used for display. At this point, thealtered green beam 152 strikes mirror 92. As previously stated, thepurpose of mirror 92 is to combine the altered green beam 152 with thealtered red beam 144 (see FIG. 17). The altered green beam 152 passesthrough mirror 92 and propagates upwardly. Mirror 92 does not change thestate of polarization of the altered green beam 152 or any other beam(altered red beam 144) striking it.

[0300] The altered green beam 152 then continues on through mirror 90because mirror 90 will pass any wavelength greater than 501 nanometers(see FIG. 17) or, alternately, other predetermined portions of the lightspectrum. As previously stated, the purpose of mirror 90 is to combinethe altered blue beam 160 (see FIG. 16 for response curve of mirror 92)with the combined, altered beams 144 and 152. It is also preferable thatmirror 90 does not change the state of polarization of any beamimpingent upon or passing through it.

[0301] After passing through mirror 90, the altered green beam 152 nowcontinues on through the polarizer analyzer 146. Any portion of thelight of the individual pixels of altered green beam 152 that is of aP-polarized orientation will pass through the polarizer analyzer 146into the projection lens 148 and be projected as part of beam 178 towardthe screen (not shown) according to the magnification of the projectionlens. The vector component of the altered green beam 152 that is not a Pvector component (S component) will be deflected by the polarizeranalyzer 146 toward the left and be absorbed by the beam block 150.Thus, the intensity of the green light at the viewing surface isdirectly proportional to the amount of rotation of the green beam'selectric field vector.

[0302] Returning now to the blue-green light beam striking the coatingsurface of mirror 84 where it is split into two beams 154, 156, a greenbeam 154 is deflected upwardly at an angle of 90° and a blue beam 156continues through mirror 84 to the left. The blue beam 156 travelingthrough 84 toward the left is a beam containing wavelengths between 415nanometers and 500 nanometers (the blue portion of the visible spectrum)or, alternately, other predetermined portions of the light spectrum, ofthe P-polarization state. The blue beam 156 continues on toward the leftand strikes the surface coating of mirror 86 (mirror 86 may be a frontsurface broadband mirror; however, it must retain the P state ofpolarization for the blue beam) and the blue beam (415-500 nanometersor, alternately, other predetermined portions of the light spectrum) isdeflected at an angle of 90° upward toward the mirror 88. A waveresponse for mirror 84 is shown in FIG. 15.

[0303] At this time, the reflected blue beam 156 from mirror 86 strikesmirror 88 for further filtering. Further filtering can be done by mirror88 on the blue beam 156 so that it will match the CIE response neededfor a good color balance (see FIGS. 10A, 10B). For instance, mirror 88can be constructed with a mirror curve as shown in FIG. 18 which isshifted toward the left so that it will transmit wavelengths above 495nanometers or, alternately, other predetermined portions of the lightspectrum, and cause the beam to appear deeper blue to the human eye. Any“unwanted” wavelengths will pass through mirror 88 and strike a bluebeam block 158 while the wanted wavelengths are deflected at an angle of90° toward the right where they pass through the blue LCD 142. Blue beamblock 158 may be constructed in the same manner as beam block absorber161 previously described. As before, it is important that mirror 88 doesnot change the state of polarization of the blue beam 156. The blueportion of the blue beam 156 passes through the blue LCD 142. Each cellalters the respective light portion by rotating the vector of theelectric field according to the image that is desired to be displayed.Thus, an altered blue beam 160, having now passed through the blue LCD142, is now an altered blue beam comprising a combination ofpolarizations for the individual pixels of a display, each pixel havinga predetermined orientation of electric field vector by the drivingelectronics. The amount of the rotation in the polarization state for anindividual pixel will eventually decide how much of the light for thatpixel passes all the way through to finally strike the screen (not shownin FIG. 8) used for display. At this point, the altered blue beam 160strikes mirror 90 and is reflected upward at an angle of 90° (as viewedin FIG. 8) for combining with altered red beam 144 and altered greenbeam 152. Mirror 90 will allow any wavelengths less than 500 nanometers,to be reflected (see FIG. 17) or, alternately, other predeterminedportions of the light spectrum. It is important that mirror 90 does notchange the state of polarization of the altered blue beam 160, or anyother beam striking it. The altered blue beam 160 now continues on tothe polarizer analyzer 146. The vector component of the individual pixellight beams that is of a P-polarized component will pass through thepolarizer analyzer 146 into the projection lens 148 and be projected asa part of beam 178 toward the screen according to the magnification ofthe projection lens. The vector component of the altered blue beam 160that is not a P vector component (S vector component) will be deflectedby the polarizer analyzer 146 toward the left and be absorbed by thebeam block 150. Beam block 150 can be fabricated in the same manner asbeam block absorber 161 previously described. Thus, the intensity of theblue light at the viewing surface is directly proportional to the amountof rotation of the blue beam's electric field vector.

[0304] At this point, all of the colors of the display (red, green andblue) have passed through the system and the projection lens 148 to beprojected 178 onto the screen (not shown in FIG. 8). They are combinedon top of each other to produce a pixelized image that has the correctcolor balance.

[0305] The projection lens 148 is either a single lens or a combinationof lenses that produces a good focused image on the screen. It has aback focal point of the distance equal to the distance from the rear ofthe lens to each one of the LCDs 138, 140, 142 in the system. Thisdistance is made the same for all of the three LCDs.

[0306] Thus, to focus and align the system, it is necessary to firstproject one of the individual colors without the others. When this isdone and the image is focused, then the second color is projected alongwith the first color and the second color LCD is moved spatially toproduce a sharp image or pixel on top of the first color pixel. Theentire image of the second color is then aligned to the image of thefirst color to make a perfect match with regard to size, focus andalignment.

[0307] Next, the second color is then turned off or blocked and then thethird color is projected along with the first color and the third colorLCD is moved spatially to produce a sharp image or pixel on top of thefirst color pixel. The entire image of the third color is then alignedto the image of the first color to make a perfect match with regard tosize, focus and alignment.

[0308] The image is then projected as beam 178 with all colors turned onand a final adjustment can then be made at this time.

[0309] The selection of the wavelengths applicable to mirrors 82 and 88can be judicially applied so that the color balances of different lampscan be adjusted for color balance of the final output without theredesign of the entire optical system (see FIGS. 10A & 10B).

[0310] When the image was projected, it was noted unexpectedly that thebrightness of the image was increased as the distance from the projectorlens to the screen increased up to a distance of approximately 10 feet(about 305 cm.). Within this range of approximately 10 feet (about 305cm.), the picture became brighter as it enlarged rather than dimmer ashad occurred in the past. When this phenomena was discovered, it wasnoted that the length of the optical path between the projector lens 148and each of the LCDs 138, 140 and 142 was approximately 13.5 in (about34 cm). The component parts shown in FIG. 8 were arranged in plan viewas shown in FIG. 8 and were encompassed with a rectangle approximately24 inches by 36 inches (about 61 cm. by 92 cm.)

[0311] While this phenomenon is not fully understood, it is believedthat this unique effect was due to the polarized nature of the light anddestructive interference of the projected light waves. It is thought atthis time that, when the picture is smaller, more wave nodes interferein a smaller area, thus the light reaching the screen is reduced. As thepicture is enlarged, the wave nodes are spaced further apart and lessinterference occurs. At a certain size, no interference takes place,and, thus, as the distance increases, the picture brightness (asmeasured in lumens/sq. ft. or lumens/sq. meter) then diminishes withgreater enlargement.

[0312] It is thought at this time that the reason this phenomena occursin this projector and not in previous projectors is the unitarypolarization of the projected beam 178. This projector uses the samepolarization for the entire beam path with the same polarizers, with theprevious projectors using individual polarizers for each of the LCDs, ofwhich different alignment of the electric field vectors occur.

[0313] An analysis of the efficiency of the system constructed inaccordance with the invention versus a prior art system that utilizes anabsorbing type of polarizer for illuminating an LCD display is asfollows:

[0314] With reference to FIG. 8.

EXAMPLE ONE Prior Art Absorbing Type of Polarizer (Kodak or SharpProjector)

[0315] lumens of light emitted by the light source=L area of circle oflight=A_(cir)=π·r²

[0316] area of aperture ofLCD=A_(LCD)=length·width=6d·8d=0.48d²=0.48·(2r)²=0.48·(4r²)=1.92r² (fora 3:4:5 LCD)

[0317] % of light impingent upon LCD due to aperture ofLCD=A_(LCD))/A_(CIR=)1.92r²/πr²=61.1%

[0318] % of light passed by absorption polarizer=total light %−absorbed%=100%−70%=30%

[0319] amount of light impingent upon LCD=light output of lamp·% oflight impingent upon LCD due to aperture of LCD % of light passed bypolarizer=L·0.611·0.30

[0320] For a lamp that emits 1000 lumens and for a one inch diagonalLCD, the light coming through an LCD is =1000·0.61·0.30=183 lumens.

[0321] This analysis, of course, does not deal with the otherinefficiencies of the system, such as the second plastic polarizerefficiencies, the collection efficiency of the lamp, or thetransmittance efficiency of the LCDs in the system.

EXAMPLE TWO System of the Invention (FIG. 8)

[0322] lumens of light emitted by the light source=L

[0323] area of circle of light=A_(CIR)=π·r²

[0324] area of aperture ofLCD=A_(LCD)=length·width=6d·8d=0.48d²=0.48·(2r)²=0.48·(4r²)=1.92r² (fora 3:4:5 LCD)

[0325] % of light impingent upon LCD due to aperture ofLCD=A_(LCD)/A_(CIR)=1.92r²/πr²=61.1% of light passed to LCD=% of lightimpingent upon LCD to aperture of LCD=A_(LCD)/A_(CIR)=1.92r²/πr²=61.1%efficiency of polarization=(0.611·0.97)·100=59%. Therefore, for a lampthat emits 1000 lumens and a one inch diagonal LCD, the light comingthrough an LCD is 1000·0.59 or 590 lumens.

[0326] This gives an improvement over the prior art system by a factorgreater than 3.2.

[0327] Referring to FIG. 8A, a functional description of FIG. 8 is shownwith the same parts, but with the part numbers removed for clarity. Theparts are grouped according to functionality, however other parts can besubstituted, removed, or added according to what is needed to beachieved. FIG. 8A shows the steps involved to achieve a method of thisinvention.

[0328] In FIGS. 8 & 8A the light source 32, the reflector 41, thecollimating lens 43, mirror 33, mirror 35 and beam stop 161 work inaccordance together, as detailed in the description of FIG. 8 above, forproducing a beam of light 57 for the projector described.

[0329] The initial resolving of the light beam 57 is accomplished whenit is sent through the polarizing means 36, as detailed in thedescription of FIG. 8 above, and initially resolved into twoorthogonally polarized light beams 52, 54. The initial resolving mayalso include a retarding of the beam by passing it through a half-waveretarder to produce a light beam 56 which is of the same polarization asthat of light beam 52.

[0330] The forming of the light beam 30 occurs when the two light beamsare respectively reflected from forming means 40, 42, 44, and 46, asdetailed in the description for FIGS. 3, 3A, 3B & 3C above, into asingle beam of light 30 as depicted in FIG. 5. Arrangements of theforming means 40, 44, 46 other than those shown in FIGS. 3, 3A & 3C arealso possible. The arrangement of forming means in FIGS. 3A & 3B are thesame. Moreover, the forming means 40, 44, 46 may be shaped and arrangedto produce a rectangular or square shaped beam, or any other desiredgeometrical shape.

[0331] The separating of the beam, as described above for FIG. 8, isachieved by passing this beam through the separating means 80, 84, 86.The formed polarized light beam 30 encounters the separating means 80where it is separated into two beams 132, 134. Deflected beam 132travels upwardly. The beam 134 strikes separating means 84 where it isseparated into two beams 154, 156. Deflected beam 154 travels upwardly.The beam 156 strikes separating means 86 where deflected beam 154travels toward the top.

[0332] Altering of the separate beams is achieved by passing the beamthrough the LCDs 138, 140, 142 or other suitable altering means, asdescribed above for FIG. 8. Each beam passes through its respective LCD.Each cell alters its respective portion of a beam by rotating theorientation of the vector of the electric field according to the imagethat is desired to be displayed. Thus, an altered beam, having nowpassed through the LCD, is an altered beam comprising a combination ofpolarizations for the individual pixels of a display, each pixel havinga predetermined orientation of electric field vector by the drivingelectronics. The amount of the rotation in the polarization state for anindividual pixel will eventually decide how much of the light for thatpixel will be passed all the way through the polarizing means 146 tofinally strike the screen (not shown in FFIG. 8A) used for display.

[0333] The adjusting of the beams 132, 156 is accomplished by passingthe beam through the adjusting means or mirrors 82, 88 and the beamstops 136, 158. Any “unwanted” wavelengths will pass through mirrors oradjusting means 82, 88 and strike beam block 136, 158 while the wantedwavelengths are deflected at an angle of 90° toward the respective LCD.Beam blocks 136, 158 can be fabricated in the same manner as beam blockabsorber 161 previously described above, as detailed in the descriptionof FIG. 8 above.

[0334] The combining of the beams 144, 152, & 160 is accomplished bypassing the beams through the combining means or mirrors 90, 92.However, these combining means can also be used for adjusting if sodesired by their beam pass/reflection criteria. The altered beam 134travels through combining means or mirror 92, while altered beam 144 isdeflected from combining means 92, which serves to combine the two beams144, 152 into a single beam. It is preferable that combining means 92does not change the state of polarization of any beam impingent upon orpassing through it. This combined beam travels through reflecting means90. It is preferable that combining means 90 does not change the stateof polarization of any beam impingent upon or passing through it. Thepurpose of combining means or mirror 90 is to combine the combinedaltered 144 and altered 152 beams with an altered beam 160 into a singlecombined altered beam, as detailed in the description of FIG. 8 above.

[0335] After the beams have been combined into a single beam they aredirected toward the resolving means where they are separated into twobeams by passing the beam through the polarizing beam splitter means146, with the desired separated beam being passed to the projectingmeans 148, as detailed in the description of FIG. 8 above.

[0336] The projecting means 148 can be either a single lens or acombination of lenses that produces a good focused image on the screen.It has a back focal point of the distance equal to the distance from therear of the lens to each one of the altering means 138, 140, 142 in thesystem. This distance is made the same for all of the three alteringmeans.

[0337] While the description above has been particularly shown anddescribed with reference to preferred embodiments thereof, it will beunderstood by those skilled in the art that various changes in form anddetails can be made without departing from the spirit and scope of thisinvention.

[0338] Referring to FIG. 8B, another alternative embodiment of the colorLCLV projector as taught in FIG. 8 is shown. FIG. 8B is an improvementover U.S. Pat. No. 4,909,601 to Yajima et al., assigned to Seiko EpsonCorp., utilizing the new and novel method and system of a singlepolarized light beam as disclosed herein. The alternate embodiment inFIG. 8B utilizes a different layout of the optical path of theinvention. As previously stated in connection with FIG. 8, a polarizedwhite light beam 30 is formed for use in the optical system. At thispoint, the white light beam 30 strikes mirror 80 and is divided into twobeams, a red beam 132, and a blue-green beam 134. Continuing on withbeam 132, it strikes mirror 82 and is deflected toward the left (asviewed in FIG. 8B) and passes through LCD 138. At this time, theorientation of the vector of the electric field is rotated responsive toa control signal input means (see FIG. 19) forming beam 144. Beam 144 isthen deflected from the dichroic beam combiner 93 and, in particular,the dichroic surface 94 and is reflected upward (as viewed in FIG. 8B)through the polarizer analyzer 146. At this point, the red beam 144 issegregated according to the P and S vector components, with the P vectorpassing on through the analyzer 146 and the S vector componentdeflecting to the left to strike beam stop 150. Returning to beam 134,the blue-green beam 134 strikes dichroic mirror 84 and is separated intoa green beam 154 and a blue beam 156. Green beam 154 is deflected upward(as viewed in FIG. 8B) through the green LCD 140 where it is alteredwith respect to the orientation of the electric field vector responsiveto a signal input means (see FIG. 14). The altered green beam 152 entersthe dichroic beam combiner 93 and passes through surfaces 94 and 96. Thebeam continues on through into polarizer analyzer 146. The P vectorcomponent passes on through to projection lens 148 with the S vectorcomponent of the beam being diverted to the left and striking beam stop150. Returning now to blue beam 156, it is deflected from mirror 86upward (as viewed in FIG. 8B) where it strikes dichroic mirror 88 and isdeflected to the right and passes through LCD 142. At this point, it hasthe orientation of the electric field vector altered by response to acontrol signal input means (see FIG. 19) and forms blue beam 160. BlueBeam 160 then enters the dichroic beam combiner 93 and is deflectedupwardly (as viewed in FIG. 8B) via surface 96 to enter the polarizeranalyzer 146. At this point, the blue beam 160 is segregated accordingto the P and S vector components that have been formed with the P vectorcomponent of beam 160 passing through the analyzer 146 to projectionlens 148 and the S vector component of beam 160 being deflected to theleft (as viewed in FIG. 8B) to strike beam stop 150.

[0339] Referring now to FIG. 8C, an alternative embodiment of FIG. 8 ofthe color LCLV projector is shown. FIG. 8C is an improvement over U.S.Pat. No. 4,864,390 to McKechnie et al., assigned to North AmericanPhilips Corp., utilizing the new and novel method and system of a singlepolarized light beam as disclosed herein. The alternative embodimentshown in FIG. 8C is functionally the same as that in FIG. 8 with theaddition that the optical path lengths from the LCDs to the light sourceare exactly the same and the optical paths of the LCDs to the beamcombiner and output lens are the same. Operation and function of thissystem is the same as that of FIG. 8. It should be further understoodthat this FIG. 8C can have the optical layout of the LCD path duplicatedand used as the second modulation subsystem to create a beam to inputinto polarizer combiner 146 to form a 3-D projector the same as thatdisclosed in FIGS. 20, 20A & 20B.

[0340] Referring now to FIG. 8D, an alternative embodiment of the colorLCLV projector as taught by FIG. 8 is shown. FIG. 8D is an improvementover U.S. Pat. No. 4,850,685 to Kamakura et al., assigned to Seiko EpsonCorp., and U.S. Pat. No. 4,943,154 to Kiyatake et al., assigned toMatsushita Electric Industrial Co. utilizing the new and novel methodand system of a single polarized light beam as disclosed herein. Thealternative embodiment of FIG. 8D operates and functions exactly thesame as that of FIG. 8 with the exception that the separate dichroicbeam splitters and combiners 80, 82 & 84 have been replaced withcombined beam splitters and combiners 93. In light of the hereindisclosed embodiments, it will now be understood that the splitting andcombining system with respect to the others can be duplicated to createanother beam that would be input into polarizer analyzer 146 to create a3-D projector that functions and operates as those shown in FIGS. 20through 20B inclusive.

[0341] In reference to FIG. 8D, as further explanation, the white lightsource beam 30 strikes the first dichroic color separator 93 and isseparated into red beam 132, green beam 154 and blue beam 156. Greenbeam 154 is passed through green LCD 140 and has its individual portionsaltered with respect to the orientation of the electric field vectorresponsive to a control means input forming altered green beam 152. Thisaltered green beam 152 then passes through the beam combiner 93 withouthaving its orientation of electric field vector changed and issegregated at polarizer analyzer 146 according to the P component and Scomponent with the P vector component passing through to the projectionlens 148, and S component being rejected upward to beam block 150 whereit is absorbed. Returning now to red beam 132, it is deflected frommirror 83 to the left (as viewed in FIG. 8D) to mirror 82 and then frommirror 82 where it is deflected downward (as viewed in FIG. 8D) throughLCD 138. Passing through LCD 138, the beam 132 has its individualportions altered with respect to the orientation of the electric fieldvector and forms altered red beam 144. Altered red beam 144 is thendeflected from surface 94 to the left (as viewed in FIG. 8D) topolarizer analyzer 146. At this point, altered red beam 144 issegregated according to the P and S components with the P componentpassing on to projection lens 148 and the S component being deflectedupward (as viewed in FIG. 8D) to beam block 150. Returning now to beam132 being deflected from surface 82, it can be further filtered at thispoint with the desired wavelengths passing to the left (as viewed inFIG. 8D) to be absorbed by beam block 136. Returning now to blue beam156 coming out of the first dichroic beam splitter 93, it is deflecteddownward (as viewed in FIG. 8D) from surface 96 and is deflected to theleft (as viewed in FIG. 8D) from surface 86. Blue beam 156 is thendeflected from mirror 88 upward (as viewed in FIG. 8D) through the blueLCD 142. LCD 142 then functions to alter the individual portions of bluebeam 142 by changing the orientation of the electric field vectorresponsive to a control signal input means (see FIG. 19) and formsaltered blue beam 160. Blue beam 160 is then reflected to the left (asviewed in FIG. 8D) from surface 96 and is passed through polarizeranalyzer 146. At this point, blue beam 160 is resolved into the P and Scomponents with the P component passing through to the lens 148 and theS component being deflected upward (as viewed in FIG. 8D) to be absorbedby beam block 150.

[0342] Returning now to blue beam 156, when it strikes mirror 88, thedesired filtering can take place with the unwanted wavelengths of bluebeam 156 passing to the left (as viewed in FIG. 8D) to be absorbed bybeam block 158 with the desired wavelengths being deflected upwardly.

[0343] Yet another alternative embodiment of a color LCLV projector isshown in FIGS. 8E through 8G. The alternative embodiment in FIG. 8Eutilizes independent light sources 170, 172 & 174 for forming a beamthat is used to alter the orientation of the electric field vector byLCDs 138, 140 & 142. These light sources 170, 172 & 174 in FIGS. 8E, 8Fmay be of several different forms and functions. Such light sources caninclude a matrix of linear array diodes formed in a rectangular shape, aplanar matrix of solid state lasers, LEDs light emitting diodes, etc.,whereas in FIG. 8G, the light sources 170 a, 172 a & 174 a can be asingle beam output laser beam with an output beam converted into arectangular shape for use by LCDs 138, 140 and 142. The light sourcesform respectively, beams 194, 196 and 198. In FIG. 8E, after each beamhas the respective portions of their beams altered by the LCDs 138, 140and 142 changing the orientation of the electric field vector of therespective portions, the altered beams 144, 152 and 160 are thencombined in dichroic beam combiner means 93 to form a single collinearbeam with a plurality of portions. This collinear beam is then passed tothe polarizer analyzer 146 where it resolves the respective portionsinto P and S components with the S component being deflected to the leftto beam block 150 and the P component passing through to the projectionlens 148 where it is then displayed on a screen (not shown in FIG. 8E).

[0344] Yet another alternative embodiment of the color LCLV projector isshown in FIG. 8F. However, the dichroic beam combiner 93 has beenreplaced by two separate dielectric mirrors 90, 92 that function tocombine the three individual beams into a single collinear beam.

[0345] In another embodiment shown in FIG. 8G, the light sources 170 a,172 a, 174 a are single beam output lasers such as are found in a gastype of laser. The output is converted to a rectangular output. The restof FIG. 8G functions and operates exactly as in FIG. 8E.

[0346] By way of example and not limitation, a system and methodconstructed in accordance with the invention offers the followingresults and advantages over prior art illumination systems for a LCLVprojector.

[0347] A rectangular singular polarized beam is created that willefficiently fill the aperture of an LCD display thus maximizing theoutput of light from an LCD projector.

[0348] The divergence of the resultant beam at the LCD display issmaller than with other methods of combination, i.e., U.S. Pat. No.4,913,529.

[0349] The system of the invention enables projectors to utilizebrighter light sources for projection, thus enabling the person viewingthe projection to see the projection source in higher ambient lightlevels.

[0350] With the system of the invention, projectors will be brighter andlighter.

[0351] With the system of the invention, projectors will consume lessenergy due to the more efficient light source.

[0352] With the system of the invention, television projected on thelarger screen video will be easier to watch.

[0353] Method for Producing a High Resolution or 3-D Projected ColorImage

[0354] With reference to FIG. 19, a schematic flow diagram of a methodfor producing a high resolution or 3-D projected color image is shown.The method and system for the invention can be summarized as follows:producing a collimated source beam of white light; separating andabsorbing infrared and ultraviolet components from the source beam;polarizing and separating the source beam into two separate orthogonallypolarized beams; changing a polarization direction of one of theorthogonally polarized beams to produce two polarized beams of the sameorientation of the electric field vector and directing each of theseparate polarized beams, respectively, to a left or a right side of theprojector; separating the polarized left side beam and the polarizedright side beam into separate polarized primary color beams (red, green,blue); further filtering the separate polarized primary color beams toprovide a color balance; alter the orientation of the electric fieldvector of the separate polarized primary color beams with separate LCD'seach of which is responsive to separate signal input means; (for 3-Dviewing, the signal input means for the left side corresponds to a lefteye image and the signal input means for the right side corresponds to aright eye image; in either case (3-D or high-resolution), the separateright side and left side signal input means are controlled by suitableelectronic control means 66. It is to be understood that controlelectronics 66 can separate the video signal of HDTV into right and leftvideo signals. As a result, this allows 3-D TV by use of the broadcaststandard for HDTV.]; combining the altered separate polarized primarycolor beams; combining altered left and right side color beams into aunitary altered beam; resolving the combined beams according to the P &S vector components of the altered beams; projecting the unitary alteredbeam onto a viewing screen; (for 3-D viewing, a viewer may wear eyeglasses having lens for viewing a left eye or a right eye imagepolarized in different directions).

[0355] Referring now to FIG. 20, a projector constructed in accordancewith an illustrative embodiment of the invention is shown. FIG. 20 islabeled with locative directions illustrating an optic path forconvenience sake only and does not necessarily resemble what the actuallayout may be. As long as all of the components are aligned in suitableoptic paths with one another, other arrangements of the illustrativecomponents arranged other than illustrated in FIG. 20 can be utilized.

[0356] Referring to the previous section, a source beam 57 is generatedfor input to the polarizer cube 36. The polarizer cube 36 separates andpolarizes the source beam 57 into two orthogonally polarized beams, beam52 and beam 54, of equal area and with different polarizations. AP-polarized beam 52L is propagated straight through the polarizer cube36 to enter the left side of the projector. The other polarizationcomponent of the source beam 57, the S-polarized portion of the sourcebeam 57, beam 54, is passed through a half-wave retarder 38 where it isconverted or changed into a beam 52R of P-polarization. Beam 52R is thenpassed into the right side of the projector. Both the left side andright side of the projector thus function with beams 52L and 52R of thesame polarization. Alternately, the projector is constructed to operatewith beams of a different polarization direction, i.e., S-polarized.

[0357] Half-wave retarder 38 may be one of a class of optical elementsknown as retarders, which serve to change the polarization of anincident wave. With a retarder, one component of the P-polarized lightis somehow caused to lag in phase behind the other component by apredetermined amount. Upon emerging from the retarder 38, the relativephase of the two components is different than it was initially and thusthe polarization state is different as well. A retardation plate thatintroduces a relative phase difference of 90° is known as half-waveretarder. Alternately, mirrors may be used to produce a light beam thathas been retarded appropriately.

[0358] A general discussion of half-wave retarder 38 requirements andspecifications has been previously discussed above. Additionally, inplace of the polarizer cube 36, any other suitable means for separatingthe source beam 57 and for producing orthogonally polarized beams (52,54) may be utilized.

[0359] The left and right sides of the projector, which are enclosed ina broken line in FIG. 20 and labeled as such, will now be described. Theleft side and the right side of the projector include identicalcomponents arranged in identical optical paths. However, the parts havean additional L or R added to distinguish one from the other. Simplystated, both the left and right side include: means (mirrors 80 and 84)for separating a polarized beam of white light (52R or 52L) intoseparate primary color beams, red, green, blue; means in the form ofLCDs 138, 140, 142, for altering the orientation of the electric fieldvector of individual portions of the separate polarized primary colorbeams responsive to separate signal input means controlled by a separateelectronic control means 60 (FIG. 19); and means (mirrors 92, 90) forcombining the altered separate polarized primary color beams.

[0360] Two separate beams, beams 62L and 62R, formed by the left sideand right side of the projector, respectively, are combined andsegregated a final time by a polarization analyzer 146 (combining andsegregating means) and projected by a projector lens 148 as a beam 178onto a viewing screen (not shown in FIG. 20).

[0361] Suitable electronic control means 66 (FIG. 19) control andcoordinate the input signals to the separate left side and right sideLCDs (138, 140, 142). For 3-D viewing, the electronic control means maybe constructed to provide a visual image to the left side correspondingto a left eye image, and to the right side corresponding to a right eyeimage. Additionally, the left eye image and the right eye image can besuperimposed with one another or timed sequentially. For example, asshown in FIG. 20, locatively, the right side can be moved up or down bymechanical or electrical means (not shown). For a high resolutionprojected image, the control means 66 can be constructed to provide avisual image to the left side which is offset from the visual imageprovided to the right side (i.e., offset by one pixel vertically orhorizontally).

[0362] For convenience sake, the identical components of the left sideand the right side of the projector are labeled with the same referencenumerals. Left side polarized light beam 52L enters the left side of theprojector and right side polarized light beam 52R enters the right sideof the projector. The operation of the left side is as previouslydescribed in the section on the color projector above and shown in FIG.20. The operation of the right side is the same with the distinction ofdifferent locative directions of the various light beams.

[0363] At this point, the beam 62L formed by the left side istransmitted into the bottom (locative direction only) of the polarizeranalyzer 146 and the beam is segregated according to the P and Scomponents of the electric field vector. The beam 62R formed by theright side of the projector is passed into the right side of thepolarizer analyzer 146 (locative direction only) and is accordinglysegregated to the P and S components of the electric field vector. Thecolor beams to be displayed (red, green and blue) have passed throughthe system and the projection lens 148 to be projected onto the screen(not shown in FIG. 20); they are combined or superimposed on each otherto produce a pixelized image that has the correct color balance. Theright side of the projector functions in exactly the same manner withthe same components. Before entering the polarizer analyzer 146,however, the polarization of right side beam 62R must be changed by thehalf-wave retarder 39 so that the right side beam 62R will be deflectedby a 90° angle for combination with the left side beam 62L.

[0364] The projection lens 148 considerations and its proximity to ascreen have been previously discussed above.

[0365]FIG. 21 illustrates such a 3-D application of a projectorconstructed in accordance with the invention. As shown in FIG. 21, ascene 70 is photographed with a left side camera 72 and a right sidecamera 74. The left side camera 72 provides an input signal 76 to theleft side of the projector 81, while the right side camera 74 providesan input signal 78 to the right side of the projector 81. The electroniccontrol means 66 (FIG. 19) may be operated as previously described toprovide these separate inputs into the projector 81 from the left sideinput 76 and the right side input 78. The left side image may bepolarized in a first direction and the right side image polarized in adifferent direction. By using viewing glasses 220, an image projectedonto a viewing surface or screen 87 appears displayed as 3-D to viewers224. Alternately, the control means 66 is configured to display leftside and right side images in a timed sequence. This will also produce a3-D effect with or without the use of glasses 220.

[0366] The alternate embodiment shown in FIG. 20A is the same as thepreferred embodiment of FIG. 20 with the addition of a quarter-waveretarder 188 situated in an optic path between the projection lens 148and the polarizer analyzer 146. The alternate embodiment projector ofFIG. 20A can be used to provide a projected image which is circularlypolarized. This can be used, for example, for providing circularlypolarized left and right side images for use with circularly polarizedviewer glass lens for 3-D projection.

[0367] Yet another alternate embodiment is shown in FIG. 20B. Thealternate embodiment of FIG. 20B is almost the same as the alternateembodiment of FIG. 20A which added the quarter-wave retarder 188. Theembodiment of FIG. 20B, however, also includes a second polarizeranalyzer 190 (on which is mounted the half-wave retarder 39 andquarter-wave retarder 188) and rejection beam block 192 situated in anoptic path between right side mirror 90R and polarizer analyzer 146. Thesecond polarizer analyzer 190 is used to further analyze, segregate andcombine the altered color beams 62R and 62L.

[0368] In FIG. 20C (another alternative embodiment of the color LCLV 3-Dprojector), there are now two constituent parts. Each constituent partgenerates a collinear beam as in FFIG. 8F. They are then combinedtogether in polarizer analyzer 146 as explained for the diagram and withreference to FIG. 8F. This combination can be of the form where thebeams are combined exactly one on the other with different polarizationsor one beam can be shifted with respect to the other so that theplurality of portions are offset from one another, or the portionsoverlap one another. Also, as explained before, the timing of the beamscan produce beams that are temporally in sync with one another or canalternate between the different fields of the desired information to bedisplayed.

[0369]FIG. 20D is the same as FIG. 20C, but with the addition of aquarter wave retarder 188 interposed between lens 148 and analyzerpolarizer 146. This variable retarder functions to alter the pluralityof portions of the segregated output beam from polarizer analyzer 146such that each altered portion has a different electric field vectororientation. Thus each altered portion may be displayed on a differentplane, such as that contained in screen or cube 175 shown in FIG. 23.

[0370] Method for Producing a High Resolution or 3-D Projected Black &White Image

[0371] Referring now to FIG. 22, an alternate embodiment high resolutionor 3-D, black and white projector is disclosed. The black and whiteprojector of FIG. 22 includes: a light source means 32 for producing acollimated source beam 50 containing white light; separation andabsorption means in the form of mirrors 33 and 35 and beam blockabsorber 161 for removing and absorbing infrared and ultraviolet raysfrom the source beam 50; polarizing means in the form of a polarizercube 36 for polarizing the source beam into two orthogonal beams, aP-polarized beam 52 and an S-polarized beam 54 with the S-polarized beamdeflected at an angle of 90°; polarization changing means in the form ofa half-wave retarder 38 for changing the direction of polarization ofthe S-polarized beam 54 to a second P-polarized beam 56; a first meansin the form of a first LCD 116 for changing the orientation of theelectric field vector of the first P-polarized beam-52 responsive to aninput image to produce an altered first beam 120; second means in theform of a second LCD 118 for changing the orientation of the electricfield vector of the second P-polarized beam 56 responsive to an inputimage to produce a second altered beam 122; a combining means in theform of a second polarizer cube 146 for combining the first 120 andsecond 122 altered beams; a second orientation of the electric fieldvector changing means in the form of a second half-wave retarder 126located in an optic path between the second LCD 118 and the secondpolarizer cube 146 for converting the direction of polarization of thesecond altered beam 122; projection lens means in the form of aprojection lens 148 for projecting a beam 128 from the second polarizercube 146 as beam 178 onto a display screen (not shown in FIG. 22); andcontrol means (not shown in FIG. 22; but see means 66 in FIG. 19) forproviding and controlling input signals to the LCDs 116, 118.

[0372] The black and white projector shown in FIG. 22 functions in thesame manner as the color projector shown in FIG. 20 without the colorseparation and combining as previously described. Moreover illuminationof the LCDs 116, 118 is similar to the method described in previoussections.

[0373] As is apparent from the previous description, first LCD 116 andsecond LCD 118 may be controlled by control means with an input image toproduce a 3-D effect or a high resolution image as previously described.That is, left eye and right eye corresponding images can be presented orencoded in different polarization states or timed sequentially or both.

[0374] Referring now to FIG. 22A, an alternate embodiment of the blackand white projector shown in FIG. 22 is shown. The alternate embodimentof FIG. 22A is exactly the same as that of FIG. 22 but with the additionof a quarter-wave retarder 188 for providing a projected image in theform of a circular polarization beam 129. As previously described, thiscan be used with circularly polarized viewer glasses for viewing a 3-Dimage.

[0375] Thus, the projector and method of the invention can also beadapted to provide a high-resolution or 3-D black and white image.

[0376] Method for Producing a 3-D Viewing Screen

[0377]FIG. 23 is the diagrammatic representation of the buildup oflayers of a projection screen or the formation of a 3-D visualizationcube. Referring now to FIG. 23, a new and novel display device isdisclosed. The device acts in accordance with a beam generated by a 3-Dprojector such as disclosed in this document. The orientation of theelectric field vector can be varied by such a device as a variableretarder 188 that is placed between the beam polarizer analyzer 146 andthe output lens 148, such as shown in FIGS. 20A, 20B & 20D. This deviceacts by rotating the orientation of the electric field vector accordingto the drive electronics. This output beam is then fed into the deviceof FIG. 23. The device in FIG. 23 comprises a multiplicity of layers,each layer having a coating that is different from the successive layerwhereby each layer is reflective to a particular (or range) orientationof the electric field vector. For example, layer 200 is reflective tothe electric field vector that corresponds to a vector that has rotationbetween 0° and 5°. Layer 202 is reflective to an electric field vectorthat has an orientation between 5° and 10°. Layer 204 is reflective toan electric field vector that has a rotation between 10° and 15°. Thiswould continue on for the multiplicity of layers that are containedwithin the device in FIG. 23. Thus, when a beam is incident upon thedevice in FIG. 23, the first image plane is on layer 200, the next imageplane is on layer 202, the next image plane on layer 204, etc. The finalimage on the nth plane 216 is then reflected. By having a multiplicityof layers, images are displayed.

[0378] An alternate to the above device would replace the reflection onthe planes with ones that would absorb, with the final plane 216transmitting the remaining light.

[0379] As an alternative to the step indexes of reflection, a device isused that has a graded index of reflection with respect to the electricfield vector of rotation for each individual plane layer.

[0380] Method for Producing a Flat Fluorescent Plate

[0381]FIGS. 24 and 24A illustrates an embodiment of a flat fluorescentor neon illumination plate that is used in conjunction with FIGS. 8E,8F, 20C & 20D. A gas, 180, is surrounded by transparent plates 182 andmetallic side pieces 176 and end caps 186. A voltage difference,applicable for the proper gas, is applied between electrodes 201,causing the atoms in the gas to go into an excited state. By coating thesurfaces of the transparent plates 182 with a material that fluoresces,light will be emitted. Furthermore, a reflecting surface 184 can beapplied to further reflect all of the light out of one surface. Inaddition, the upper surface 182 that light is emitted from can be madeor formed like FIG. 27, such that the light emitted will be collimated.Also, by choosing different gases, different coatings on the transparentplates 182, and different excitation voltages and currents, the lightemitted may be of different light spectrums (colors and intensities).

[0382] Method for Producing Laser Diode Matrix Array

[0383]FIG. 25 demonstrates the linear matrix array of individual LEDs orlaser diodes 164 on substrate 166 that could be used for generating acollimated light source for use in FIGS. 8E, 8F, 20C & 20D. Light isemitted from laser diode 164 (or LED) in a collimated beam from itssurface in a single beam. The system is made of a plurality of laserdiodes 164 arranged in an appropriate matrix to line up with the cellsin the LCDs.

[0384] Method for Producing a Collimated Beam of Light

[0385]FIG. 28 is a preferred embodiment of an optical integrator/lightsource/reflector arrangement that provides a new and novel method ofproviding a collimated light beam with a substantially uniform fluxintensity substantially across the entire beam. The operation of thebasic elements are well known, however the combination of the elementsis novel. The way the device operates is as follows:

[0386] (1) light is emitted by the light source 32 in a sphericalfashion;

[0387] (2) portions of the light emitted from the light source willeither travel in the forward direction or rearward direction (as viewedin FIG. 28) and behave in the manner of one of the following four cases:

[0388] (a) strike the first lenses 45 formed on the first ends of theplurality of light pipes included in the light integrator means 63 asshown by light path 69 in FIG. 28; or

[0389] (b) strike the second concave reflecting means 65 where the lightis reflected from and directed back toward the first concave reflectingmeans 41 where it is then reflected from and directed toward the lightintegrator means 63 and strike the first lenses 45 formed on the firstends of the plurality of light pipes included in the light integratormeans 63 as shown by light path 77 in FIG. 28; or

[0390] (c) strike the first concave reflecting means 41 and be reflectedtoward the light integrator 63 where it strikes the first lenses 45formed on the first ends of the plurality of light pipes included in thelight integrator means 63 as shown by light path 67 in FIG. 28; or

[0391] (d) strike the first concave reflecting 41 where it is reflectedfrom and directed towards the second concave reflecting means 65 wherethe light is then reflected and directed back toward the first concavereflecting means 41 where it is reflected and directed toward the lightintegrator 63 to strike the first lenses 45 formed on the first ends ofthe plurality of light pipes included in the light integrator means 63as shown by light path 68 in FIG. 28;

[0392] (3) the light striking the first lenses 45 of the plurality oflight pipes will be bent according to the angle of entry and lensformula and travel through the body 75 of the light pipe and exit thelight pipe through the second lens 71 formed on the second end of thelight pipe 75; and

[0393] (4) the light at this time has substantially uniform fluxintensity and collimation, and travels to lens 43 for furthercollimation.

[0394] The light integrator means is made of a plurality of parallellight pipes such as those shown in FIG. 27A, each light pipe being[adjacent and] in contact with one or more adjacent light pipes. Eachlight pipe consists of a first lens surface 45 formed on a first endthereof, a body 75, and a second lens surface 71 formed on a second endthereof. The first lens surface 45 functions to bend light more towardsthe normal. Body 75 carries the light to the second lens surface 71 andhas the same index of refraction as the first lens surface 45 and secondlens surface 71. This minimizes the number of interfaces the light mustpass through. Continuing on, light strikes the second lens surface 71which is ground to a predetermined shape, and is again bent more normal,thus the light rays exiting surface 71 are substantially collimated.Lens surfaces 45 and 71 may or may not be of the same shape or form andare dependent upon several factors, including, but not exclusive to, thesize of the light source, the shape of the light source, the type oflight source, the distance from the light source to the first lenssurface 45, the length and size of body 75, the distance of theintegrator second lens surf ace 71 to the target, and other factorsknown in the trade.

[0395] As shown in FIG. 28, the second concave reflecting means 65 hasan opening formed therethrough in which is mounted a light integratormeans 63. The light integrator means 63 substantially occupies theopening in said second concave reflecting means 65. The light integratormeans 63 has an optical axis that is coincident with the optical axis ofthe second concave reflecting means 65. The cross section of the lightintegrator means 63 may be either rectangular, circular, elliptical,octagonal, or any desired shape. The shape of the light integrator meansis dependent upon the final desired shape of the beam formed exitingfrom the integrator.

[0396] The first concave reflecting surface means 41 has an opticalaxis. The light means 32 is mounted along said optical axis. The opticalaxes of the first and second concave reflecting means 41 and 65 arecoincident.

[0397] The system of this invention preferably includes a lens 43positioned to receive the light from the second end of the lightintegrator means 63. The lens 43 further collimates the light beam fromthe light integrator means 63.

[0398] The first and second concave reflecting means 41 and 65 arepreferably parabolic or elliptical in shape.

[0399] The optical light pipes are formed in a fly-eye arrangement injuxtaposition to each other as shown in FIGS. 27, 27B & 27C. The opticallight pipes can be of circular, rectangular, octagonal, or anyconvenient geometrical shape as required by the application intended asshown in FIGS. 27B & 27C.

[0400] The light integrator means 63 is well known in prior art, asshown in U.S. Pat. No. 4,918,583 to Kudo et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,769,750to Matsumoto et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,497,015 to Konno et al., U.S. Pat.No. 4,668,077 to Tanaka. These patents are mainly for forming a uniformintensity across a beam of light or ultraviolet for use in integratedcircuit manufacturing. However the interaction of the light source, thetwo reflecting surfaces and the light integrator is novel. In order tomake the system work properly, the design must take into considerationthe light source and its radiation pattern, the first and secondreflecting means 41 and 65 and the lenses 45, 71 formed respectively onthe first and second surfaces of each light pipe included in the lightintegrator means 63 and the position of the particular individual lightpipe in the matrix of the light integrator means 63. For such analysis,a commercially available computer ray tracing program such as OpticsAnalyst or Genii-Plus available from Genesse Optics Software, Inc., 3136Winton Road South, Rochester, N.Y., 14623 or Beam Two, Beam Three, orBeam Four from Stellar Software, P.O. Box 10183, Berkeley, Calif., 94709can be used in the design of the lens and reflecting means formula forthe shapes needed in regard with the particular light source that ischosen.

[0401] Thus, the invention provides a color liquid crystal light valveLCD projector that produces an image of high brightness, contrast andresolution. Additionally, harmful infrared and ultraviolet rays havebeen removed from the projected image. Moreover, in light of the hereindescribed invention, components of the system can be modified or easilyadjusted to produce a color enhanced image.

[0402] At the present time, the overall preferred single embodiment of aprojector constructed in accordance with the invention disclosed hereinis a projector for producing a modulated beam of light suitable forprojection of video images, comprising: means for providing a firstinitial beam of light having randomly changing orientations of theselected component of the electric field vectors; means for integratingthe first initial beam of light to form a second initial beam of lighthaving a substantially uniform flux intensity across substantially theentire second initial beam of light; means for collimating the secondinitial beam of light into an initial collimated beam of light havingrandomly changing orientations of the selected component of the electricfield vectors and a substantially uniform flux intensity acrosssubstantially the entire second initial beam of light; means forremoving from the initial collimated beam of light at least a portion ofultraviolet and infrared to produce an initial collimated beam of whitelight and directing the removed portions to a beam stop whereby theremoved portion is absorbed; means for resolving from the initialcollimated beam of white light an initial collimated first resolved beamof white light having substantially a first single selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electric fieldvectors and an initial collimated second resolved beam of white lighthaving substantially a second single selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of the electric field vectors, whereby the firstand second single selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors are different from one another;means for forming from the initial collimated first resolved beam ofwhite light and initial collimated second resolved beam of white light asubstantially collimated rectangular initial single beam of white lighthaving substantially the same single selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of the electric field vectors across substantiallythe entire beam of light and a substantially uniform flux intensityacross substantially the entire initial collimated single beam of whitelight; means for separating the collimated rectangular initial singlebeam of white light into two or more separate collimated rectangularbeams of color whereby each of the separate collimated rectangular beamof color has the same single selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of the electric field vectors as that of the otherseparate collimated rectangular beams of colors and each separatecollimated rectangular beam of color having a different color from theother separate collimated rectangular beams of colors; means foradjusting the color by removing at least a predetermined portion ofcolor of at least one of the separate collimated rectangular beam ofcolors and directing the removed portion to a beam stop whereby theremoved portion is absorbed; means for altering the single selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors of a plurality of portions of each separate collimatedrectangular beam of color by passing a plurality of portions of eachseparate collimated rectangular beam of color through a respective oneof a plurality of altering means whereby the single selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors of the plurality of portions of each separate beam of color isaltered in response to a stimulus means by applying a signal means tothe stimulus means in a predetermined manner as the plurality ofportions of each of the substantially collimated separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy passes through the respective one of theplurality of altering the single selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of the electric field vectors; means for combining thealtered separate collimated rectangular beams of color into a singlecollimated rectangular collinear color beam without substantiallychanging the altered selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors of the plurality of portions ofeach separate collimated rectangular beam of color, means for resolvingfrom the single collimated rectangular collinear color beam a firstcollimated rectangular resolved color beam having substantially a firstsingle selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of theelectric field vectors and second collimated rectangular resolved colorbeam having substantially a second single selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of the electric field vectors, wherebythe first and second single selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electric field vectors are different from oneanother; and means for passing one of the first collimated rectangularor second collimated rectangular resolved color beam to a projectionmeans.

[0403] In light of the previous discussions and further in thedescription and claims, it will become apparent that the followingpartial list of the advantages of the invention is:

[0404] high brightness is easily achieved: brightness is limited only bythe LCD characteristics, and brightness is not changed by the reflectionof any of the light paths back into the light source, brightness can beeasily modified by changing light sources;

[0405] improved efficiency means lower heat: a high efficiency opticalpath is utilized and the only significant heating in the optics is dueto LCD absorption;

[0406] modifications are simple: optics can accommodate any intensityand variety of LCDs;

[0407] a unique light path provides a rectangular beam: less ghosting,no light is returned to the light source, better polarization control,high contrast ratios, more compact projector, more easily manufactured,refuses or eliminates light diffraction, no deterioration of thepolarizers;

[0408] longevity: longer life polarizers, the components are exposed toless heat;

[0409] increased resolution/brightness: not resolution limited, improvedresolution with increased brightness;

[0410] materials: uses transmissive (non-reflective) LCDs, polarizers donot absorb light, reduces the number of imaging objects, reduced amountof critical imaging objects;

[0411] registration of pixels: provides a collinear output beam with noangular difference between pixels;

[0412] color resolution and registration is easily adjusted;

[0413] three-dimensional capability can be obtained with the same typeof components at little additional cost;

[0414] other objects, advantages and capabilities of the presentinvention will become more apparent as the description proceeds.

[0415] While the invention has been particularly shown and describedwith reference to preferred embodiments thereof, it will be understoodby those skilled in the art that various changes in form and details canbe made without departing from the spirit and scope of this invention.NO. Use Description of usage 30 combined polarized beam from source 31point light source 32 light source 33 infrared mirror 34 LCD display 35ultraviolet mirror 36 polarizing beam splitter 37 ultraviolet portion ofsource beam 55 38 half-wave retarder 39 half-wave retarder 40 Broad bandmirror 41 light source reflecting means 42 Broad band mirror 43collimating lens or means 44 Broad band mirror 45 first lensing surface46 Broad band mirror 47 polarized separated beam 48 color filters 49separated polarized beam 50 unpolarized collimated beam of light 51input polarized beam into LCD 52 P polarized beam 53 reflected beam 54 Spolarized beam 55 resultant beam without infrared portion 56 reflectedsecond P-polarized beam 57 source beam without ultraviolet portion 58separated reflected beam 59 altered polarized beam 60 separatedreflected beam 62 left side beam output 63 integrator 64 right side beamoutput 65 light source reflecting means 66 control means 67 light ray 68light ray 69 light ray 70 scene 71 second lensing surface 72 left sidecamera 73 rays from light source 74 right side camera 75 body ofintegrator 76 left side input to projector 77 light ray 78 right sideinput to projector 80 red - green/blue splitting mirror 81 projector 82red mirror/filtering means 84 green - blue splitting mirror 86 bluemirror 87 viewing screen 88 blue mirror/filter 89 quarter-wave retarder90 mirror/combiner for red/green-blue 92 mirror/combiner for red andgreen 93 dichroic combiner or splitter 94 coating in X dichroic(oriented for red) 96 coating in X dichroic (oriented for blue) 100 LCDcell or pixel 101 liquid crystal material 103 transparent plate 104transparent plate 105 spacer for LCD cell 106 spacer for LCD cell 107sealing element 108 sealing element 109 conductive coating 110conductive coating 116 first LCD 118 second LCD 120 first altered beam122 second altered beam 126 second half-wave retarder 128 combined S&Pbeam 129 Combined S&P beam in elliptical beam 132 red beam 134green/blue beam 136 red beam block 138 red LCD 140 green LCD 141Infrared portion of visible light beam 142 blue LCD 144 altered red beam146 polarizer analyzer 148 projector lens 150 rejection beam block 152altered green beam 154 green beam 156 blue beam 158 blue beam block 160altered blue beam 161 beam block absorber 164 laser diodes or leds 166substrate 170 Single red light source 171 beam expander means 172 Singlegreen light source 174 Single blue light source 175 3D polarizationviewing device 176 metallic end pieces 178 Projected beam through lens180 gas 182 clear plates of glass for fluorescent tubes 184 silverreflector 186 end cap 188 quarter-wave retarder 189 Variable retarder190 second polarizer analyzer 192 rejection beam-block 194 collimatedred beam with 1 polarization 196 collimated green beam with Ipolarization 198 collimated blue beam with 1 polarization 200 1stsurface for reflecting polarized beam 201 Electrodes 202 2nd surface forreflecting polarized beam 204 3rd surface for reflecting polarized beam206 4th surface for reflecting polarized beam 208 5th surface forreflecting polarized beam 210 6th surface for reflecting polarized beam212 7th surface for reflecting polarized beam 214 8th surface forreflecting polarized beam

What is claimed is:
 1. A method of producing a modulated beam ofelectromagnetic energy comprising: [a] producing an initial beam ofelectromagnetic energy having a predetermined range of wavelengths andhaving a substantially uniform flux intensity substantially across theinitial beam of electromagnetic energy; [b] separating the initial beamof electromagnetic energy into two or more separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy, each of the separate beams of electromagneticenergy having a selected predetermined orientation of a chosen componentof electromagnetic wave field vectors; [c] altering the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors of a plurality of portions of each of the separatebeams of electromagnetic energy by passing the plurality of portions ofeach of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy through arespective one of a plurality of altering means whereby the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors of the plurality of portions of each of the separatebeams of electromagnetic energy is altered in response to a stimulusmeans by applying a signal means to the stimulus means in apredetermined manner as the plurality of portions of each of thesubstantially separate beams of electromagnetic energy passes throughthe respective one of the plurality of means for altering the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors; [d] combining the altered separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy into a single collinear beam of electromagneticenergy without substantially changing the altered selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors of the plurality of portions of each of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy; and [e] resolving from the single collinear beamof electromagnetic energy a first resolved beam of electromagneticenergy having substantially a first selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors and a secondresolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially a secondselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors, whereby the first and secondselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors are different from one another.
 2. Amethod as described in claim 1 wherein step [a] includes producing theinitial beam of electromagnetic energy further having randomly changingorientations of a selected component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors, and step [b] includes separating the initial beam ofelectromagnetic energy into two or more separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy whereby each of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy has substantially the same selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors substantially across each of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy as that of the other separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy.
 3. A method as described in claim 1 wherein step[a] includes producing the initial beam of electromagnetic energyfurther having substantially the same selected predetermined orientationfor the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectorssubstantially across the beam.
 4. A method as described in claim 1wherein step [b] includes separating the initial beam into two or moresubstantially collimated separate beams.
 5. A method as described inclaim 1 wherein step [a] includes producing the initial beam ofelectromagnetic energy further having a rectangular cross sectional areaand further having substantially the same selected predeterminedorientation for the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors substantially across the beam.
 6. A method as described in claim1 further comprising the step of passing one of the resolved beams ofelectromagnetic energy from step [e] to a projection means.
 7. A methodas described in claim 1 further comprising the step of adjusting theelectromagnetic spectrum of at least one of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy.
 8. A method as described in claim 7 wherein thestep of adjusting the electromagnetic spectrum of at least one of theseparate beams of electromagnetic energy includes adjusting apredetermined range of wavelengths of at least one of the separate beamsof electromagnetic energy.
 9. A method as described in claim 7 whereinthe step of adjusting the electromagnetic spectrum of at least one ofthe separate beams of electromagnetic energy includes adjusting themagnitude of at least one of the separate beams of electromagneticenergy.
 10. A method as described in claim 1 wherein the step ofseparating the initial beam of electromagnetic energy into two or moreseparate beams of electromagnetic energy further includes means forseparating the initial beam of electromagnetic energy into two or moreseparate beams of electromagnetic energy with each of the separate beamsof electromagnetic energy having an energy spectrum different from eachof the other separate beams of electromagnetic energy.
 11. A method asdescribed in claim 1 wherein the step for separating the initial beam ofelectromagnetic energy into two or more separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy further includes the step of separating theinitial beam of electromagnetic energy into two or more separate beamsof electromagnetic energy with each of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy having a predetermined range of wavelengthsdifferent from each of the other separate beams of electromagneticenergy.
 12. A method as described in claim 10 further comprising thestep of adjusting the magnitude of at least one of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy from step [b].
 13. A method of producing amodulate, beam of light comprising: [a] producing an initial beam oflight having a predetermined range of wavelengths and having asubstantially uniform flux intensity substantially across the initialbeam of light; [b] separating the initial beam of light into two or moreseparate beams of light, each of the separate beams of light having aselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of electricfield vectors; [c] altering the selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electric field vectors of a plurality ofportions of each of the separate beams of light by passing the pluralityof portions of each of the separate beams of light through a respectiveone of a plurality of altering means whereby the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the separate beams of light is alteredin response to a stimulus means by applying a signal means to thestimulus means in a predetermined manner as the plurality of portions ofeach of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy passes through therespective one of the plurality or means for altering the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors; [d] combining the altered separate beams of light into a singlecollinear beam of light without substantially changing the alteredselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors of the plurality of portions of each of theseparate beams of light; and [e] resolving from the single collinearbeam of light a first resolved beam of light having substantially afirst selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectric field vectors and a second resolved beam of light havingsubstantially a second selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electric field vectors, whereby the first and secondselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors are different from one another.
 14. A method asdescribed in claim 13 wherein step [a] includes producing the initialbeam of light further having randomly changing orientations of aselected component of the electric field vectors, and step [b] includesseparating the initial beam of light into two or more separate beams oflight whereby each of the separate beams of light has substantially thesame selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors substantially across each of the separate beamsof light as that of the other separate beams of light.
 15. A method asdescribed in claim 13 wherein step [a] includes producing the initialbeam of light further having substantially the same selectedpredetermined orientation for the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors substantially across the beam.
 16. A method as described inclaim 13 wherein step [b] includes separating the initial beam into twoor more substantially collimated separate beams.
 17. A method asdescribed in claim 13 wherein step [a] includes producing the initialbeam of light further having a rectangular cross sectional area andfurther having substantially the same selected predetermined orientationfor the chosen component of the electric field vectors substantiallyacross the beam.
 18. A method as described in claim 13 furthercomprising the step of passing one of the resolved beams of light fromstep [e] to a projection means.
 19. A method as described in claim 13further comprising the step of adjusting the light spectrum of at leastone of the separate beams of light.
 20. A method as described in claim19 wherein the step of adjusting the light spectrum of at least one ofthe separate beams of light includes adjusting a predetermined range ofwavelengths of at least one of the separate beams of light.
 21. A methodas described in claim 19 wherein the step of adjusting the lightspectrum of at least one of the separate beams of light includesadjusting the magnitude of at least one of the separate beams of light.22. A method as described in claim 22 wherein the step of separating theinitial beam of light into two or more separate beams of light furtherincludes the step of separating the initial beam of light into two ormore separate beams of light with each of the separate beams of lighthaving a light spectrum different from each of the other separate beamsof light.
 23. A method as described in claim 22 wherein the step ofseparating the initial beam of light into two or more separate beams oflight further includes the step of separating the initial beam of lightinto two or more separate beams of light with each of the separate beamsof light having a predetermined range of wavelengths different from eachof the other separate beams of light.
 24. A method as described in claim22 further comprising the step of adjusting the magnitude of at leastone of the separate beams of light from step [b].
 25. A method asdescribed in claim 1 wherein step [a] includes producing an initial beamof ultraviolet.
 26. A system for producing a modulated beam ofelectromagnetic energy comprising: [a] means for producing an initialbeam of electromagnetic energy having a predetermined range ofwavelengths and having a substantially uniform flux intensitysubstantially across the initial beam of electromagnetic energy; [b]means for separating the initial beam of electromagnetic energy into twoor more separate beams of electromagnetic energy, each of the separatebeams of electromagnetic energy having a selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors;[c] means for altering the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of aplurality of portions of each of the separate beams of electromagneticenergy by passing the plurality of portions of each of the separatebeams of electromagnetic energy through a respective one of a pluralityof altering means whereby the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the separate beams of electromagneticenergy is altered in response to a stimulus means by applying a signalmeans to the stimulus means in a predetermined manner as the pluralityof portions of each of the substantially separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy passes through the respective one of theplurality of means for altering the selected predetermined orientationof the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors; [d]means for combining the altered separate beams of electromagnetic energyinto a single collinear beam of electromagnetic energy withoutsubstantially changing the altered selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the separate beams of electromagneticenergy; and [e] means for resolving from the single collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy a first resolved beam of electromagnetic energyhaving substantially a first selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors and a secondresolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially a secondselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors, whereby the first and secondselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors are different from one another.
 27. Asystem as described in claim 26 wherein the means for producing aninitial beam includes means for producing the initial beam ofelectromagnetic energy further having randomly changing orientations ofa selected component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors, and themeans for separating the initial beam includes means for separating theinitial beam of electromagnetic energy into two or more separate beamsof electromagnetic energy whereby each of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy has substantially the same selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors substantially across each of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy as that of the other separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy.
 28. A system as described in claim 26 whereinthe means for producing an initial beam includes means for producing theinitial beam of electromagnetic energy with substantially the sameselected predetermined orientation for the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors substantially across the beam.
 29. Asystem as described in claim 26 including means for substantiallycollimating each beam of electromagnetic energy.
 30. A system asdescribed in claim 26 wherein the means for producing an initial beamincludes means for producing the initial beam of electromagnetic energywith a rectangular cross sectional area and substantially the sameselected predetermined orientation for the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors substantially across the beam.
 31. Asystem as described in claim 26 further comprising means for passing oneof the resolved beams of electromagnetic energy to a projection means.32. A system as described in claim 26 further comprising means foradjusting the electromagnetic spectrum of at least one of the separatebeams of electromagnetic energy.
 33. A system as described in claim 32wherein the means for adjusting the electromagnetic spectrum of at leastone of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy includes means foradjusting the predetermined range of wavelengths of at least one of theseparate beams of electromagnetic energy.
 34. A system as described inclaim 32 wherein the means for adjusting the electromagnetic spectrum ofat least one of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy includesmeans for adjusting the magnitude of at least one of the separate beamsof electromagnetic energy.
 35. A system as described in claim 26 whereinthe means for separating the initial beam of electromagnetic energy intotwo or more separate beams of electromagnetic energy further includesmeans for separating the initial beam of electromagnetic energy into twoor more separate beams of electromagnetic energy with each of theseparate beams of electromagnetic energy having an energy spectrumdifferent from each of the other separate beams of electromagneticenergy.
 36. A system as described in claim 35 wherein the means forseparating the initial beam of electromagnetic energy into two or moreseparate beams of electromagnetic energy further includes means forseparating the initial beam of electromagnetic energy into two or moreseparate beams of electromagnetic energy with each of the separate beamsof electromagnetic energy having a predetermined range of wavelengthsdifferent from each of the other separate beams of electromagneticenergy.
 37. A system as described in claim 35 further comprising thestep of means for adjusting the magnitude of at least one of theseparate beams of electromagnetic energy.
 38. A system for producing amodulated beam of light comprising: [a] means for producing an initialbeam of light having a predetermined range of wavelengths and having asubstantially uniform flux intensity substantially across the initialbeam of light; [b] means for separating the initial beam of light intotwo or more separate beams of light, each of the separate beams of lighthaving a selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectric field vectors; [c] means for altering the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors of a plurality of portions of each of the separate beams oflight by passing the plurality of portions of each of the separate beamsof light through a respective one of a plurality of altering meanswhereby the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electric field vectors of the plurality of portions of each ofthe separate beams of light is altered in response to a stimulus meansby applying a signal means to the stimulus means in a predeterminedmanner as the plurality of portions of each of the substantiallyseparate beams of electromagnetic energy passes through the respectiveone of the plurality of means for altering the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors; [d]means for combining the altered separate beams of light into a singlecollinear beam of light without substantially changing the alteredselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors of the plurality of portions of each of theseparate beams of light; and [e] means for resolving from the singlecollinear beam of light a first resolved beam of light havingsubstantially a first selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electric field vectors and a second resolved beam of lighthaving substantially a second selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electric field vectors, whereby the first and secondselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors are different from one another.
 39. A system asdescribed in claim 38 wherein the means for producing an initial beamincludes means for producing the initial beam of light with randomlychancing orientations of a selected component of the electric fieldvectors, and the means for separating the initial beam includes meansfor separating the initial beam of light into two or more separate beamsof light whereby each of the separate beams of light has substantiallythe same selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electric field vectors substantially across each of the separatebeams of light as that of the other separate beams of light.
 40. Asystem as described in claim 38 wherein the means for producing aninitial beam includes means far producing the initial beam of light withsubstantially the same selected predetermined orientation for the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors substantially across the beam.41. A system as described in claim 38 including means for substantiallycollimating each beam of light.
 42. A system as described in claim 38wherein the means for producing an initial beam includes means forproducing the initial beam of light with a rectangular cross sectionalarea and substantially the same selected predetermined orientation forthe chosen component of the electric field vectors substantially acrossthe beam.
 43. A system as described in claim 38 further comprising meansfor passing one of the resolved beams of light to a projection means.44. A system as described in claim 38 further comprising means foradjusting the light spectrum of at least one of the separate beams oflight.
 45. A system as described in claim 44 wherein the means foradjusting the light spectrum of at least one of the separate beams oflight includes means for adjusting the predetermined range ofwavelengths of at least one of the separate beams of light.
 46. A systemas described in claim 44 wherein the means for adjusting the lightspectrum of at least one of the separate beams of light includes meansfor adjusting the magnitude of at least one of the separate beams oflight.
 47. A system as described in claim 38 wherein the means forseparating the initial beam of light into two or more separate beams oflight further includes means for separating the initial beam of lightinto two or more separate beams of light with each of the separate beamsof light having a light spectrum different from each of the otherseparate beams of light.
 48. A system as described in claim 47 whereinthe means for separating the initial beam of light into two or moreseparate beams of light further includes means for separating theinitial beam of light into two or more separate beams of light with eachof the separate beams of light having a predetermined range ofwavelengths different from each of the other separate beams of light.49. A system as described in claim 47 further comprising the means foradjusting the magnitude of at least one of the separate beams of light.50. A system as described in claim 26 wherein the means for producing aninitial beam of electromagnetic energy includes means for producing aninitial beam of ultraviolet.
 51. A method of producing a modulated beamof electromagnetic energy, comprising: [a] providing a substantiallycollimated primary beam of electromagnetic energy having a predeterminedrange of wavelengths; [b] resolving from the substantially collimatedprimary beam of electromagnetic energy a substantially collimatedprimary first resolved beam of electromagnetic energy havingsubstantially a first selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors and a substantiallycollimated primary second resolved beam of electromagnetic energy havingsubstantially a second selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors, whereby the firstand second selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electromagnetic wave field vectors are different from one another;[c] forming from the substantially collimated primary first resolvedbeam of electromagnetic energy and the substantially collimated primarysecond resolved beam of electromagnetic energy a substantiallycollimated initial beam of electromagnetic energy having substantiallythe same selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors substantially across thesubstantially collimated initial beam of electromagnetic energy and asubstantially uniform flux intensity substantially across thesubstantially collimated initial beam of electromagnetic energy; [d]separating the substantially collimated initial beam of electromagneticenergy into two or more substantially collimated separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy, each of the substantially collimated separatebeams of electromagnetic energy having a selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors;[e] altering the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of a plurality ofportions of each of the substantially collimated separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy by passing the plurality of portions of each ofthe substantially collimated separate beams of electromagnetic energythrough a respective one of a plurality of altering means whereby theselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors of the plurality of portions of eachof the substantially collimated separate beams of electromagnetic energyis altered in response to a stimulus means by applying a signal means tothe stimulus means in a predetermined manner as the plurality ofportions of each of the substantially collimated separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy passes through the respective one of theplurality of means for altering the selected predetermined orientationof the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors; [f]combining the substantially collimated altered separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy into a substantially collimated single collinearbeam of electromagnetic energy without substantially changing thealtered selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electromagnetic wave field vectors of the plurality of portions ofeach of the substantially collimated separate beams of electromagneticenergy; and [g] resolving from the substantially collimated singlecollinear beam of electromagnetic energy a substantially collimatedfirst resolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially afirst selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors and a substantially collimated secondresolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially a secondselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors, whereby the first and secondselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors are different from one another.
 52. Amethod as described in claim 51 wherein step [d] includes separating thesubstantially collimated initial beam of electromagnetic energy into twoor more substantially collimated separate beams of electromagneticenergy whereby each of the substantially collimated separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy has substantially the same selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors substantially across each of the substantially collimatedseparate beams of electromagnetic energy as that of the othersubstantially collimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy.
 53. Amethod as described in claim 52 wherein step [c] includes forming thesubstantially collimated initial beam of electromagnetic energy furtherhaving a rectangular cross sectional area.
 54. A method as described inclaim 53 further comprising the step of passing one of the substantiallycollimated resolved beams of electromagnetic energy to a projectionmeans.
 55. A method as described in claim 52 further comprising the stepof adjusting the electromagnetic spectrum of at least one of thesubstantially collimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy.
 56. Amethod as described in claim 55 wherein the step of adjusting theelectromagnetic spectrum of at least one of the substantially collimatedseparate beams of electromagnetic energy includes adjusting apredetermined range of wavelengths of at least one of the substantiallycollimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy.
 57. A method asdescribed in claim 55 wherein the step of adjusting the electromagneticspectrum of at least one of the substantially collimated separate beamsof electromagnetic energy includes adjusting a magnitude of at least oneof the substantially collimated separate beams of electromagneticenergy.
 58. A method as described in claim 51 wherein step [d] includesseparating the substantially collimated initial beam of electromagneticenergy into two or more substantially collimated separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy whereby each of the substantially collimatedseparate beams of electromagnetic energy has a substantially differentselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors substantially across each of thesubstantially collimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy fromthat of the other substantially collimated separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy.
 59. A method as described in claim 52 furthercomprising the step of passing one of the substantially collimatedprimary resolved beams of electromagnetic energy through a means forchanging the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electromagnetic wave field vectors.
 60. A method as described inclaim 59 wherein the step of passing one of the substantially collimatedprimary resolved beams of electromagnetic energy through a means forchanging the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electromagnetic wave field vectors includes passing one of thesubstantially collimated primary resolved beams of electromagneticenergy through a liquid crystal device for changing the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors.
 61. A method as described in claim 52 furthercomprising the step of passing one of the substantially collimatedprimary resolved beams of electromagnetic energy through a means forchanging a selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors and changing the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors of one of the substantially collimated primaryresolved beam of electromagnetic energy to match substantially theselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors of the other substantially collimatedprimary resolved beam of electromagnetic energy.
 62. A method asdescribed in claim 52 wherein step [c] further comprises the step ofproviding one or more reflecting means, each of the reflecting meanshaving means for changing the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors, andreflecting one of the substantially collimated primary resolved beams ofelectromagnetic energy from one or more of the reflecting means.
 63. Amethod as described in claim 62 wherein the step of providing one ormore reflecting means, each of the reflecting means including one ormore planar reflecting surface with a dielectric coating, each planarreflecting surface with a dielectric coating having means for changingthe selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors, and reflecting one of thesubstantially collimated primary resolved beams of electromagneticenergy from one or more of the planar reflecting surfaces with adielectric coating.
 64. A method as described in claim 62 wherein thestep of providing one or more reflecting means, each of the reflectingmeans including a mirror having a thin film dielectric material, eachmirror having a thin film dielectric material having means for changingthe selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors, and reflecting one of thesubstantially collimated primary resolved beams of electromagneticenergy from one or more of the mirrors having a thin film dielectricmaterial.
 65. A method as described in claim 52 wherein step [a]includes providing a substantially collimated primary beam ofelectromagnetic energy further having a substantially uniform fluxintensity across substantially the entire primary beam ofelectromagnetic energy.
 66. A method as described in claim 52 furthercomprising the step of removing from at least one of the beams ofelectromagnetic energy at least a predetermined portion of apredetermined range of wavelengths.
 67. A method as described in claim66 further including directing the removed portions to an absorptionmeans.
 68. A method as described in claim 52 further comprising the stepof removing from the substantially collimated primary beam ofelectromagnetic energy at least a predetermined portion of apredetermined range of wavelengths and directing the removed portions toan absorption means.
 69. A method of producing a modulated beam oflight, comprising: [a] providing a substantially collimated primary beamof light having a predetermined range of wavelengths; [b] resolving fromthe substantially collimated primary beam of light a substantiallycollimated primary first resolved beam of light having substantially afirst selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of theelectric field vectors and a substantially collimated primary secondresolved beam of light having substantially a second selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electric fieldvectors, whereby the first and second selected predetermined orientationof the chosen component of the electric field vectors are different fromone another; [c] forming from the substantially collimated primary firstresolved beam of light and the substantially collimated primary secondresolved beam of light a substantially collimated initial beam of lighthaving a substantially the same selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electric field vectors substantially across thesubstantially collimated initial beam of light and a substantiallyuniform flux intensity substantially across the substantially collimatedinitial beam of light; [d] separating the substantially collimatedinitial beam of light into two or more substantially collimated separatebeams of light, each of the substantially collimated separate beams oflight having a selected predetermined orientation of a chosen componentof electric field vectors; [e] altering the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of aplurality of portions of each of the substantially collimated separatebeams of light by passing the plurality of portions of each of thesubstantially collimated separate beams of light through a respectiveone of a plurality of altering means whereby the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the substantially collimated separatebeams of light is altered in response to a stimulus means by applying asignal means to the stimulus means in a predetermined manner as theplurality of portions of each of the substantially collimated separatebeams of electromagnetic energy passes through the respective one of theplurality of means for altering the selected predetermined orientationof the chosen component of the electric field vectors; [f] combining thesubstantially collimated altered separate beams of light into asubstantially collimated single collinear beam of light withoutsubstantially changing the altered selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electric field vectors of the plurality ofportions of each of the substantially collimated separate beams oflight; and [g] resolving from the substantially collimated singlecollinear beam of light a substantially collimated first resolved beamof light having substantially a first selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of electric field vectors and a substantiallycollimated second resolved beam of light having substantially a secondselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of electricfield vectors, whereby the first and second selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors aredifferent from one another.
 70. A method as described in claim 69wherein step [d] includes separating the substantially collimatedinitial beam of light into two or more substantially collimated separatebeams of light whereby each of the substantially collimated separatebeams of light has substantially the same selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectorssubstantially across each of the substantially collimated separate beamsof light as that of the other substantially collimated separate beams oflight.
 71. A method as described in claim 70 wherein step [c] includesforming the substantially collimated initial beam of light furtherhaving a rectangular cross sectional area.
 72. A method as described inclaim 71 further comprising the step of passing one of the substantiallycollimated resolved beams of light to a projection means.
 73. A methodas described in claim 70 further comprising the step of adjusting thelight spectrum of at least one of the substantially collimated separatebeams of light.
 74. A method as described in claim 73 wherein the stepof adjusting the light spectrum of at least one of the substantiallycollimated separate beams of light includes adjusting a predeterminedrange of wavelengths of at least one of the substantially collimatedseparate beams of light.
 75. A method as described in claim 73 whereinthe step of adjusting the light spectrum of at least one of thesubstantially collimated separate beams of light includes adjusting themagnitude of at least one of the substantially collimated separate beamsof light.
 76. A method as described in claim 69 wherein step [d]includes separating the substantially collimated initial beam of lightinto two or more substantially collimated separate beams of lightwhereby each of the substantially collimated separate beams of light hasa substantially different selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electric field vectors substantially across eachof the substantially collimated separate beams of light as that of theother substantially collimated separate beams of light.
 77. A method asdescribed in claim 70 further comprising the step of passing one of thesubstantially collimated primary resolved beams of light through a meansfor changing the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors.
 78. A method as described inclaim 77 wherein the step of passing one of the substantially collimatedprimary resolved beams of light through a means for changing theselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors includes passing one of the substantiallycollimated primary resolved beams of light through a liquid crystaldevice for changing the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors.
 79. A method as described inclaim 70 further comprising the step of passing one of the substantiallycollimated primary resolved beams of light through a means for changinga selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of electricfield vectors and changing the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electric field vectors of one of thesubstantially collimated primary resolved beam of light to matchsubstantially the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors of the other substantiallycollimated primary resolved beam of light.
 80. A method as described inclaim 70 wherein step [c] further comprises the step of providing one ormore reflecting means, each of the reflecting means having means forchanging the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electric field vectors, and reflecting one of the substantiallycollimated primary resolved beams of light from one or more of thereflecting means.
 81. A method as described in claim 80 wherein the stepof providing one or more reflecting means, each of the reflecting meansincluding one or more planar reflecting surface with a dielectriccoating, each planar reflecting surface with a dielectric coating havingmeans for changing the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors, and reflecting one of thesubstantially collimated primary resolved beams of light from one ormore of the planar reflecting surfaces with a dielectric coating.
 82. Amethod as described in claim 80 wherein the step of providing one ormore reflecting means, each of the reflecting means including a mirrorhaving a thin film dielectric material, each mirror having a thin filmdielectric material having means for changing the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors, andreflecting one of the substantially collimated primary resolved beams oflight from one or more of the mirrors having a thin film dielectricmaterial.
 83. A method as described in claim 70 wherein step [a]includes providing a substantially collimated primary beam of lightfurther having a substantially uniform flux intensity acrosssubstantially the entire primary beam of light.
 84. A method asdescribed in claim 70 further comprising the step of removing from oneor more of the beams of light at least a predetermined portion of apredetermined range of wavelengths.
 85. A method as described in claim84 further including directing the removed portions to an absorptionmeans.
 86. A method as described in claim 70 further comprising the stepof removing from the substantially collimated primary beam of light atleast a predetermined portion of a predetermined range of wavelengthsand directing the removed portions to an absorption means.
 87. A methodas described in claim 51 wherein step [a] includes producing a primarybeam of ultraviolet.
 88. A system of producing a modulated beam ofelectromagnetic energy, comprising: [a] means for providing asubstantially collimated primary beam of electromagnetic energy having apredetermined range of wavelengths; [b] means for resolving from thesubstantially collimated primary beam of electromagnetic energy asubstantially collimated primary first resolved beam of electromagneticenergy having substantially the first selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors and asubstantially collimated primary second resolved beam of electromagneticenergy having substantially a second selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors, wherebythe first and second selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors are different fromone another; [c] means for forming from the substantially collimatedprimary first resolved beam of electromagnetic energy and thesubstantially collimated primary second resolved beam of electromagneticenergy a substantially collimated initial beam of electromagnetic energyhaving substantially the same selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors substantiallyacross the substantially collimated initial beam of electromagneticenergy and a substantially uniform flux intensity substantially acrossthe substantially collimated initial beam of electromagnetic energy; [d]means for separating the substantially collimated initial beam ofelectromagnetic energy into two or more substantially collimatedseparate beams of electromagnetic energy, each of the substantiallycollimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy having a selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors; [e] means for altering the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors of a plurality of portions of each of the substantiallycollimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy by passing theplurality of portions of each of the substantially collimated separatebeams of electromagnetic energy through a respective one of a pluralityof altering means whereby the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the substantially collimated separatebeams of electromagnetic energy is altered in response to a stimulusmeans by applying a signal means to the stimulus means in apredetermined manner as the plurality of portions of each of thesubstantially collimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy passesthrough the respective one of the plurality of means for means foraltering the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electromagnetic wave field vectors; [f] means for combining eachof the substantially collimated altered separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy with the other substantially collimated alteredseparate beams of electromagnetic energy into a substantially collimatedsingle collinear beam of electromagnetic energy without substantiallychanging the altered selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of the plurality ofportions of each of the substantially collimated separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy; and [g] means for resolving from thesubstantially collimated single collinear beam of electromagnetic energya substantially collimated first resolved beam of electromagnetic energyhaving substantially a first selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors and asubstantially collimated second resolved beam of electromagnetic energyhaving substantially a second selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors, whereby thefirst and second selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors are different fromone another.
 89. A system as described in claim 88 wherein step [d]includes means for separating the substantially collimated initial beamof electromagnetic energy into two or more substantially collimatedseparate beams of electromagnetic energy whereby each of thesubstantially collimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy hassubstantially the same selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors substantially acrosseach of the substantially collimated separate beams of electromagneticenergy as that of the other substantially collimated separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy.
 90. A system as described in claim 89 whereinstep [c] includes means for forming the substantially collimated initialbeam of electromagnetic energy further having a rectangular crosssectional area.
 91. A system as described in claim 90 further comprisingthe step of means for passing one of the substantially collimatedresolved beams of electromagnetic energy from step [g] to a projectionmeans.
 92. A system as described in claim 89 further comprising the stepof means for adjusting the electromagnetic spectrum of at least one ofthe substantially collimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy.93. A system as described in claim 92 wherein the step of means foradjusting the electromagnetic spectrum of at least one of thesubstantially collimated separate beams of electromagnetic energyincludes means for adjusting a predetermined range of wavelengths of atleast one of the substantially collimated separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy.
 94. A system as described in claim 92 whereinthe step of means for adjusting the electromagnetic spectrum of at leastone of the substantially collimated separate beams of electromagneticenergy includes means for adjusting a magnitude of at least one of thesubstantially collimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy.
 95. Asystem as described in claim 88 wherein step [d] includes means forseparating the substantially collimated initial beam of electromagneticenergy into two or more substantially collimated separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy whereby each of the substantially collimatedseparate beams of electromagnetic energy has a substantially differentselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors substantially across each of thesubstantially collimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy asthat of the other substantially collimated separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy.
 96. A system as described in claim 89 furthercomprising the step of means for passing one of the substantiallycollimated primary resolved beams of electromagnetic energy through ameans for changing the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors.
 97. A system asdescribed in claim 96 wherein the step of means for passing one of thesubstantially collimated primary resolved beams of electromagneticenergy through a means for changing the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors includes means for passing one of the substantially collimatedprimary resolved beams of electromagnetic energy through a liquidcrystal device for changing the selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors.
 98. Asystem as described in claim 89 further comprising the step of means forpassing one of the substantially collimated primary resolved beams ofelectromagnetic energy through a means for changing a selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors and changing the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of one of thesubstantially collimated primary resolved beam of electromagnetic energyto match substantially the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of the othersubstantially collimated primary resolved beam of electromagneticenergy.
 99. A system as described in claim 98 wherein step [c] furthercomprises the step of means for reflecting one of the substantiallycollimated primary resolved beams of electromagnetic energy from one ormore reflecting means, each of the reflecting means having means forchanging the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electromagnetic wave field vectors.
 100. A system as described inclaim 98 wherein the step of means for reflecting one of thesubstantially collimated primary resolved beams of electromagneticenergy from one or more reflecting means, each of the reflecting meanshaving means for changing the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors includesmeans for reflecting one of the substantially collimated primaryresolved beams of electromagnetic energy from one or more planarreflecting surface with a dielectric coating, each planar reflectingsurface with a dielectric coating having means for changing the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors.
 101. A system as described in claim 99 wherein thestep of means for reflecting one of the substantially collimated primaryresolved beams of electromagnetic energy from one or more reflectingmeans, each of the reflecting means having means for changing theselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors includes means for reflecting one ofthe substantially collimated primary resolved beams of electromagneticenergy from one or more mirrors having a thin film dielectric material,each mirrors having a thin film dielectric material having means forchanging the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electromagnetic wave field vectors.
 102. A system as described inclaim 99 wherein step [a] includes the substantially collimated primarybeam of electromagnetic energy further having a substantially uniformflux intensity across substantially the entire primary beam ofelectromagnetic energy.
 103. A system as described in claim 99 furthercomprising the step of means for removing from at least one of the beamsof electromagnetic energy at least a predetermined portion of apredetermined range of wavelengths.
 104. A system as described in claim103 further including directing the removed portions to an absorptionmeans.
 105. A system as described in claim 89 further comprising thestep of means for removing from the substantially collimated primarybeam of electromagnetic energy at least a predetermined portion of apredetermined range of wavelengths and directing the removed portions toan absorption means.
 106. A system of producing a modulated beam oflight, comprising: [a] means for providing a substantially collimatedprimary beam of light having a predetermined range of wavelengths; [b]means for resolving from the substantially collimated primary beam oflight—a substantially collimated primary first resolved beam of lighthaving substantially a first selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of the electric field vectors and a substantiallycollimated primary second resolved beam of light having substantially asecond selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of theelectric field vectors, whereby the first and second selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors are different from one another; [c] means for forming from thesubstantially collimated primary first resolved beam of light and thesubstantially collimated primary second resolved beam of light asubstantially collimated initial beam of light having substantially thesame selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectric field vectors substantially across the substantially collimatedinitial beam of light and a substantially uniform flux intensitysubstantially across the substantially collimated initial beam of light;[d] means for separating the substantially collimated initial beam oflight into two or more substantially collimated separate beams of light,each of the substantially collimated separate beams of light having aselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of electricfield vectors; [e] means for altering the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of aplurality of portions of each of the substantially collimated separatebeams of light by passing the plurality of portions of each of thesubstantially collimated separate beams of light through a respectiveone of a plurality of altering means whereby the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the substantially collimated separatebeams of light is altered in response to a stimulus means by applying asignal means to the stimulus means in a predetermined manner as theplurality of portions of each of the substantially collimated separatebeams of electromagnetic energy passes through the respective one of theplurality of means for altering the selected predetermined orientationof the chosen component of the electric field vectors; [f] means forcombining the substantially collimated altered separate beams of lightinto a substantially collimated single collinear beam of light withoutsubstantially changing the altered selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electric field vectors of the plurality ofportions of each of the substantially collimated separate beams oflight; and [g] means for resolving from the substantially collimatedsingle collinear beam of light a substantially collimated first resolvedbeam of light having substantially a first selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electric field vectors and asubstantially collimated second resolved beam of light havingsubstantially a second selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electric field vectors, whereby the first and secondselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors are different from one another.
 107. A system asdescribed in claim 106 wherein the means for separating thesubstantially collimated initial beam of light into two or moresubstantially collimated separate beams of light includes means forproducing two or more substantially collimated separate beams of lighteach having substantially the same selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electric field vectors substantially acrosseach of the substantially collimated separate beams of light as that ofthe other substantially collimated separate beam or beams of light. 108.A system as described in claim 107 wherein the means for forming thesubstantially collimated initial beam of light further includes meansfor forming the substantially collimated initial beam having arectangular cross sectional area.
 109. A system as described in claim108 further comprising means for passing one of the substantiallycollimated resolved beams of light to a projection means.
 110. A systemas described in claim 107 further comprising means for adjusting thelight spectrum of at least one of the substantially collimated separatebeams of light.
 111. A system as described in claim 110 wherein meansfor adjusting the light spectrum of at least one of the substantiallycollimated separate beams of light includes means for adjusting apredetermined range of wavelengths of at least one of the substantiallycollimated separate beams of light.
 112. A system as described in claim110 wherein means for adjusting the light spectrum of at least one ofthe substantially collimated separate beams of light includes means foradjusting the magnitude of at least one of the substantially collimatedseparate beams of light.
 113. A system as described in claim 106 whereinthe means for separating the substantially collimated initial beam oflight into two or more substantially collimated separate beams of lightincludes means for producing two or more substantially collimatedseparate beams of light each having a substantially different selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors substantially across each of the substantially collimatedseparate beams of light as that of the other substantially collimatedseparate beam or beams of light.
 114. A system as described in claim 107further comprising means for passing one of the substantially collimatedprimary resolved beams of light through a means for changing theselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors.
 115. A system as described in claim 114 whereinmeans for passing one of the substantially collimated primary resolvedbeams of light through a means for changing the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectorsincludes means for passing one of the substantially collimated primaryresolved beams of light through a liquid crystal device for changing theselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors.
 116. A system as described in claim 107 furthercomprising means for passing one of the substantially collimated primaryresolved beams of light through a means for changing the selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors and changing the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electric field vectors of one of thesubstantially collimated primary resolved beam of light to matchsubstantially the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors of the other substantiallycollimated primary resolved beam of light.
 117. A system as described inclaim 107 wherein the means for forming the substantially collimatedprimary first resolved beam and second resolved beam includes means forreflecting one of the substantially collimated primary resolved beams oflight from one or more reflecting means, each of the reflecting meanshaving means for changing the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electric field vectors.
 118. A system asdescribed in claim 117 wherein means for reflecting one of thesubstantially collimated primary resolved beams of light from one ormore reflecting means, each of the reflecting means having means forchanging the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electric field vectors, includes means for reflecting one of thesubstantially collimated primary resolved beams of light from one ormore planar reflecting surfaces having a dielectric coating, each planarreflecting surface having a dielectric coating including means forchanging the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electric field vectors.
 119. A system as described in claim 117wherein the means for reflecting one of the substantially collimatedprimary resolved beams of light from one or more reflecting means, eachof the reflecting means having means for changing the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors, includes means for reflecting one of the substantiallycollimated primary resolved beams of light from one or more mirrorshaving a thin film dielectric material, each mirror having a thin filmdielectric material including means for changing the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors.
 120. A system as described in claim 107 wherein the means forproviding a substantially collimated primary beam of light includesmeans for providing a substantially collimated primary beam of lighthaving a substantially uniform flux intensity across substantially theentire primary beam of light.
 121. A system as described in claim 107further comprising means for removing from at least one of the beams oflight at least a predetermined portion of a predetermined range ofwavelengths.
 122. A system as described in claim 121 further comprisingmeans for directing the removed portions to an absorption means.
 123. Asystem as described in claim 107 further comprising means for removingfrom the substantially collimated primary beam of light at least apredetermined portion of a predetermined range of wavelengths anddirecting the removed portions to an absorption means.
 124. A system asdescribed in claim 88 wherein the means for providing a substantiallycollimated primary beam includes producing a primary beam ofultraviolet.
 125. A method of displaying an image, comprising: [a]providing an illumination subsystem including producing a primary beamof light having a predetermined range of wavelengths, randomly changingorientations of a chosen component of electric field vectors, and asubstantially uniform flux intensity substantially across the initialbeam of light; [b] providing a modulation subsystem, including; [i]separating the primary beam of light into two or more primary colorbeams of light, each of the primary color beams having the same selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors as that of the other primary color beams; [ii] providing two ormore altering means for changing the selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of electric field vectors; [iii] altering theselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors of a plurality of portions of each of theseparate primary color beams of light by passing the plurality ofportions of each of the separate primary color beam or beams of lightthrough a respective one of a plurality of altering means whereby theselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors of the plurality of portions of each of theseparate primary color beams of light is altered in response to astimulus means by applying a signal means to the stimulus means in apredetermined manner as the plurality of portions of each of theseparate primary color beams of light passes through the respective oneof the plurality of means for altering the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors; [iv]combining the altered separate primary color beams of light into asingle collinear beam of light without substantially changing thealtered selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electric field vectors of the plurality of portions of each of theseparate beams of light; [v] resolving from the single collinear beam oflight a first resolved beam of light having substantially a firstselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of electricfield vectors and a second resolved beam of light having substantially asecond selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectric field vectors, whereby the first and second selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors are different from one another; [c] providing a projectionsubsystem and passing at least one of the resolved beams of lightthereto; and [d] [i] forming a first light path from the illuminationsubsystem to the altering means in which the first light path is equalfor all altering means; and [ii] forming a second light path from eachof the altering means to the projection subsystem in which the secondlight path is equal for all altering means.
 126. A method as describedin claim 125 wherein step [a] includes forming the primary beam of lightfurther having a rectangular cross sectional area.
 127. A displaysystem, comprising: [a] an illumination subsystem including means forproducing a primary beam of light having a predetermined range ofwavelengths, randomly changing orientations of a chosen component ofelectric field vectors, and a substantially uniform flux intensitysubstantially across the initial beam of light; [b] a modulationsubsystem, including; [i] means for separating the primary beam of lightinto two or more primary color beams of light, each of the primary colorbeams having the same selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electric field vectors as that of the other primary colorbeams; [ii] two or more altering means for changing the selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors; [iii] means for passing the plurality of portions of each ofthe separate primary color beams of light through a respective one ofthe altering means whereby the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electric field vectors of the plurality ofportions of each of the separate primary color beams of light is alteredin response to a stimulus means by applying a signal means to thestimulus means in a predetermined manner as the plurality of portions ofeach of the separate primary color beams of light passes through therespective one of the plurality of means for altering the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors; [iv] means for combining the altered separate primary colorbeams of light into a single collinear beam of light withoutsubstantially changing the altered selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electric field vectors of the plurality ofportions of each of the separate beams of light; [v] means for resolvingfrom the single collinear beam of light a first resolved beam of lighthaving substantially a first selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electric field vectors and a second resolved beam oflight having substantially a second selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of electric field vectors, whereby the first andsecond selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors are different from one another; [c] a projectionsubsystem and means for passing at least one of the resolved beams fromthe single collinear beam of light thereto; [d] [i] each altering meansbeing disposed at a first path length from the illumination subsystem,the first path length being equal for each of the altering means; and[ii] each of the altering means being disposed at a second path lengthfrom the projection subsystem, the second path length being equal foreach of the altering means.
 128. A system as described in claim 127wherein the illumination subsystem includes means for including a theprimary beam of light further having a rectangular cross sectional area.129. A method for displaying an image projected from a liquid crystaldevice which includes a first liquid crystal light valve, a secondliquid crystal light valve and a third liquid crystal light valve,comprising: [a] producing a primary beam of light having a predeterminedrange of wavelengths, randomly changing orientations of a chosencomponent of electric field vectors, and a substantially uniform fluxintensity substantially across the initial beam of light; [b] separatingthe primary beam of light into two or more primary color beams of light,each of the primary color beams having the same selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electric field vectors as that ofthe other primary color beam or beams; [c] forming optical light pathsbetween the light source and the three liquid crystal light valves whichare unequal in length and based on luminous intensity of the primarycolors associated with respective light valve produced by the lightsource; [d] altering the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electric field vectors of a plurality ofportions of each of the separate primary color beams of light by passingthe plurality of portions of each of the separate primary color beams oflight through a respective one of the liquid crystal light valveswhereby the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electric field vectors of the plurality of portions of each ofthe separate primary color beams of light is altered in response to astimulus means by applying a signal means to the stimulus means in apredetermined manner as the plurality of portions of each of theseparate primary color beams of light passes through the respective oneof the liquid crystal light valves altering the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors; [e]combining the altered separate primary color beams of light into asingle collinear beam of light without substantially changing thealtered selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electric field vectors of the plurality of portions of each of theseparate beams of light; [f] resolving from the single collinear beam oflight a first resolved beam of light having substantially a firstselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of electricfield vectors and a second resolved beam of light having substantially asecond selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectric field vectors, whereby the first and second selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors are different from one another; and [g] passing at least one ofthe resolved beams from the single collinear beam of light to aprojection means.
 130. A system or displaying an image projected from aliquid crystal device which includes means for a first liquid crystallight valve, a second liquid crystal light valve and a third liquidcrystal light valve, comprising: [a] means for producing a primary beamof light having a predetermined range of wavelengths, randomly changingorientations of a chosen component of electric field vectors, and asubstantially uniform flux intensity substantially across the initialbeam of light; [b] means for separating the primary beam of light intotwo or more primary color beams of light, each of the primary colorbeams having the same selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electric field vectors as that of the other primary colorbeams; [c] means for forming the optical light paths between the lightsource and the three liquid crystal light valves which are unequal inlength and based on luminous intensity of the primary colors associatedwith respective light valve produced by the light source; [d] means foraltering the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electric field vectors of a plurality of portions of each of theseparate primary color beams of light by passing the plurality ofportions of each of the separate primary color beams of light through arespective one of the liquid crystal light valves whereby the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors of the plurality of portions of each of the separate primarycolor beams of light is altered in response to a stimulus means byapplying a signal means to the stimulus means in a predetermined manneras the plurality of portions of each of the separate primary color beamsof light passes through the respective one of the liquid crystal lightvalves altering the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors; [e] means for combining thealtered separate primary color beams of light into a single collinearbeam of light without substantially changing the altered selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors of the plurality of portions of each of the separate beams oflight; [f] means for resolving from the single collinear beam of light afirst resolved beam of light having substantially a first selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors and a second resolved beam of light having substantially asecond selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectric field vectors, whereby the first and second selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors are different from one another; and [g] means for passing atleast one of the resolved beams to a projection means.
 131. Aprojection-type color display device, comprising: [a] means forproducing a collimated primary beam of light having a predeterminedrange of wavelengths, randomly changing orientations of a chosencomponent of electric field vectors, a substantially uniform fluxintensity substantially across the initial beam of light, and arectangular cross sectional area; [b] means for separating thecollimated primary beam of light into the primary color beams of red,blue and green, each of the primary color beams having the same selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors as that of the other primary color beams; [c] means for alteringthe selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors of a plurality of portions of each of theseparate primary color beams of red, blue and green by passing theplurality of portions of each of the separate primary color beams ofred, blue and green through a respective one of a plurality of liquidcrystal light valves whereby the selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electric field vectors of the plurality ofportions of each of the separate primary color beams of red, blue andgreen is altered in response to a stimulus means by applying a signalmeans to the stimulus means in a predetermined manner as the pluralityof portions of each of the separate primary color beams of light passesthrough the respective one of the liquid crystal light valves alteringthe selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors; [d] means for combining the altered separateprimary color beams into a single collinear beam of light withoutsubstantially changing the altered selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electric field vectors of the plurality ofportions of each of the separate beams of red, blue and green by passingthe altered separate primary color beams through a color synthesis cubehaving a reflecting surface for synthesizing the red, blue and greenbeams into a single collinear beam of light; [e] means for resolvingfrom the single collinear beam of light a first resolved beam of lighthaving substantially a first selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electric field vectors and a second resolved beam oflight having substantially a second selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of electric field vectors, whereby the first andsecond selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors are different from one another; and [f] means forpassing at least one of the resolved beams to a projection means.
 132. Aprojection apparatus, comprising: [a] means for producing a primary beamof light having a predetermined range of wavelengths, randomly changingorientations of a chosen component of electric field vectors, asubstantially uniform flux intensity substantially across the initialbeam of light, and a rectangular cross sectional area; [b] means forseparating the primary beam of light into three primary color beams oflight, each of the primary color beams having the same selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors as that of the other primary color beams; [c] three means foraltering the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electric field vectors of a plurality of portions of each of theseparate primary color beams of light by passing the plurality ofportions of each of the separate primary color beams of light through arespective one of the altering means whereby the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the separate primary color beams oflight is altered in response to a stimulus means by applying a signalmeans to the stimulus means in a predetermined manner as the pluralityof portions of each of the separate primary color beams of light passesthrough the respective one of the means for altering the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors; [d] means for combining the altered separate primary colorbeams of light into a single collinear beam of light withoutsubstantially changing the altered selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electric field vectors of the plurality ofportions of each of the separate beams of light by dichroic reflectionsurfaces intersecting in X-letter form; [e] means for resolving from thesingle collinear beam of light a first resolved beam of light havingsubstantially a first selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electric field vectors and a second resolved beam of lighthaving substantially a second selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electric field vectors, whereby the first and secondselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors are different from one another; [f] means forpassing at least one of the resolved beams from the single collinearbeam of light to a projection means; [g] a driving circuit for drivingeach of the three altering means according to the signal means; whereinthe color separating means comprises a first flat-plate type dichroicmirror and a second flat-plate type dichroic mirror intersecting inX-letter form, light paths from the intersecting part to each of thealtering means having lengths such that the path of the color lightwhich advances straightly through the color separating means is theshortest, the second dichroic mirror being constructed by two dichroicmirrors separated at the intersecting part so that the dichroicreflecting surfaces of the two dichroic mirrors are placed on mutuallydifferent planes to allow two-edge surfaces of the two dichroic mirrorsforming the intersecting part to be seen as being at least partiallyoverlapping when the color-separating means is observed from the outputlight side in a direction along its input light.
 133. A method ofproducing one or more collinear beams of electromagnetic energy,comprising: [a] producing two or more separate beams of electromagneticenergy, each of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy having thesame selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors substantially across each beam, apredetermined range of wavelengths and a substantially uniform fluxintensity substantially across the beam of electromagnetic energy; [b]altering the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electromagnetic wave field vectors of a plurality of portions ofeach of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy by passing theplurality of portions of each of the separate beams of electromagneticenergy through a respective one of a plurality of altering means wherebythe selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors of the plurality of portions of eachof the separate beams of electromagnetic energy is altered in responseto a stimulus means by applying a signal means to the stimulus means ina predetermined manner as the plurality of portions of each of theseparate beams of electromagnetic energy passes through the respectiveone of the plurality of means for altering the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors; [c] combining the altered separate beams of electromagneticenergy into a single collinear beam of electromagnetic energy withoutsubstantially changing the altered selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the separate beams of electromagneticenergy; and [d] resolving from the single collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy a first resolved beam of electromagnetic energyhaving substantially a first selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors and a secondresolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially a secondselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors, whereby the first and secondselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors are different from one another. 134.A method as described in claim 133 wherein step [a] includes producingeach separate beam of electromagnetic energy further having arectangular cross sectional area.
 135. A method as described in claim133 further comprising the step of passing one of the resolved beams ofelectromagnetic energy to a projection means.
 136. A method as describedin claim 133 further comprising the step of adjusting theelectromagnetic spectrum of at least one of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy.
 137. A method as described in claim 136 whereinthe step of adjusting the electromagnetic spectrum of at least one ofthe separate beams of electromagnetic energy includes adjusting apredetermined range of wavelengths of at least one of the separate beamsof electromagnetic energy.
 138. A method as described in claim 136wherein the step of adjusting the electromagnetic spectrum of at leastone of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy includes adjustingthe magnitude of at least one of the separate beams of electromagneticenergy.
 139. A method of producing one or more collinear beams of light,comprising: [a] producing two or more separate beams of light, each ofthe separate beams of light having the same selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electric field vectorssubstantially across each beam, a predetermined range of wavelengths anda substantially uniform flux intensity substantially across the beam oflight; [b] altering the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors of a plurality of portions ofeach of the separate beams of light by passing the plurality of portionsof each of the separate beams of light through a respective one of aplurality of altering means whereby the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the separate beams of light is alteredin response to a stimulus means by applying a signal means to thestimulus means in a predetermined manner as the plurality of portions ofeach of the separate beams of light passes through the respective one ofthe plurality of means for altering the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors; [c]combining the altered separate beams of light into a single collinearbeam of light without substantially changing the altered selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors of the plurality of portions of each of the separate beams oflight; and [d] resolving from the single collinear beam of light a firstresolved beam of light having substantially a first selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors and a second resolved beam of light having substantially asecond selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectric field vectors, whereby the first and second selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors are different from one another.
 140. A method as described inclaim 139 wherein step [a] includes producing each separate beam oflight further having a rectangular cross sectional area.
 141. A methodas described in claim 139 further comprising the step of passing one ofthe resolved beams of light to a projection means.
 142. A method asdescribed in claim 139 further comprising the step of adjusting thelight spectrum of at least one of the separate beams of light.
 143. Amethod as described in claim 142 wherein the step of adjusting the lightspectrum of at least one of the separate beams of light includesadjusting a predetermined range of wavelengths of at least one of theseparate beams of light.
 144. A method as described in claim 142 whereinthe step of adjusting the light spectrum of at least one of the separatebeams of light includes adjusting the magnitude of at least one of theseparate beams of light.
 145. A system of producing one or morecollinear beams of electromagnetic energy, comprising: [a] means forproducing two or more separate beams of electromagnetic energy, each ofthe separate beams of electromagnetic energy having a same selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors substantially across each beam, a predetermined range ofwavelengths and a substantially uniform flux intensity substantiallyacross the beam of electromagnetic energy; [b] means for altering theselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors of a plurality of portions of each ofthe separate beams of electromagnetic energy by passing the plurality ofportions of each of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy througha respective one of a plurality of altering means whereby the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors of the plurality of portions of each of the separatebeams of electromagnetic energy is altered in response to a stimulusmeans by applying a signal means to the stimulus means in apredetermined manner as the plurality of portions of each of theseparate beams of electromagnetic energy passes through the respectiveone of the plurality of means for altering the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors; [c] means for combining the altered separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy into a single collinear beam of electromagneticenergy without substantially changing the altered selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors of the plurality of portions of each of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy; and [d] means for resolving from the singlecollinear beam of electromagnetic energy a first resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy having substantially a first selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors and a second resolved beam of electromagnetic energyhaving substantially a second selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors, whereby thefirst and second selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors are different fromone another.
 146. A system as described in claim 145 in which the meansfor providing two or more separate beams of electromagnetic energyincludes means for producing each separate beam of electromagneticenergy having a rectangular cross sectional area.
 147. A system asdescribed in claim 145 further comprising means for passing one of theresolved beams of electromagnetic energy to a projection means.
 148. Asystem as described in claim 145 further comprising means for adjustingthe electromagnetic spectrum of at least one of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy.
 149. A system as described in claim 148 in whichthe means for adjusting the electromagnetic spectrum of at least one ofthe separate beams of electromagnetic energy includes means foradjusting a predetermined range of wavelengths of at least one of theseparate beams of electromagnetic energy.
 150. A system as described inclaim 148 in which the means for adjusting the electromagnetic spectrumof at least one of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy includesmeans for adjusting a magnitude of at least one of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy.
 151. A system of producing one or more collinearbeams of light, comprising: [a] means for producing two or more separatebeams of light, each of the separate beams of light having a sameselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of electricfield vectors substantially across each beam, a predetermined range ofwavelengths and a substantially uniform flux intensity substantiallyacross the beam of light; [b] means for altering the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors of a plurality of portions of each of the separate beams oflight by passing the plurality of portions of each of the separate beamsof light through a respective one of a plurality of altering meanswhereby the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electric field vectors of the plurality of portions of each ofthe separate beams of light is altered in response to a stimulus meansby applying a signal means to the stimulus means in a predeterminedmanner as the plurality of portions of each of the separate beams oflight passes through the respective one of the plurality of means foraltering the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electric field vectors; [c] means for combining the alteredseparate beams of light into a single collinear beam of light withoutsubstantially changing the altered selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electric field vectors of the plurality ofportions of each of the separate beams of light; and [d] means forresolving from the single collinear beam of light a first resolved beamof light having substantially a first selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of electric field vectors and a second resolvedbeam of light having substantially a second selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electric field vectors, whereby thefirst and second selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors are different from one another.152. A system as described in claim 151 in which the means for producingtwo or more separate beams of light includes means for producing eachseparate beam of light having a rectangular cross sectional area.
 153. Asystem as described in claim 151 further comprising means for passingone of the resolved beams of light to a projection means.
 154. A systemas described in claim 151 further comprising means for adjusting thelight spectrum of at least one of the separate beams of light.
 155. Asystem as described in claim 154 in which the means for adjusting thelight spectrum of at least one of the separate beams of light includesmeans for adjusting a predetermined range of wavelengths of at least oneof the separate beams of light.
 156. A system as described in claim 154in which the means for adjusting the light spectrum of at least one ofthe separate beams of light includes means for adjusting the magnitudeof at least one of the separate beams of light.
 157. A method ofproducing a modulated beam of visible light in which the brightness ofthe image increases as the distance from the projector lens to a screenincreases up to a distance of approximately 10 feet, comprising: [a]producing a beam of electromagnetic energy having a substantiallyuniform flux intensity substantially across the entire beam; [b]separating the beam of electromagnetic energy into two or more separateelectromagnetic energy beams, each of the electromagnetic energy beamshaving a predetermined orientation of electromagnetic wave field vector;[c] passing a plurality of portions of each separated electromagneticenergy beam through a respective one of a plurality of means forchanging the orientation of the electromagnetic wave field vectorwhereby the orientation of electromagnetic wave field vector of theplurality of portions of the electromagnetic energy beams is altered assame passes through the respective one of the plurality of means forchanging the orientation of electromagnetic wave field vector; [d]combining the separated electromagnetic energy beams into a singlecollinear beam of electromagnetic energy without changing the alteredorientation of the electromagnetic wave field vector of the plurality ofportions of the electromagnetic energy beams; [e] producing twosegregated electromagnetic energy beams from the collinear beam, eachsegregated electromagnetic energy beam having an orientation ofelectromagnetic wave field vector different from the otherelectromagnetic energy beam; [f] locating a projection means such thatthe distance of the light path between the projection means and each ofthe plurality of means for changing the orientation of theelectromagnetic wave field vector is substantially equal; [g] passingone of the segregated beams of electromagnetic beams of electromagneticenergy to the projection means; [h] locating a surface means up toapproximately 10 feet of the projection means; and [i] passing the oneof the segregated beams of electromagnetic energy from the projectionmeans to the surface means.
 158. A method of producing a modulated beamof light suitable for projection of video images, comprising: [a]producing an initial beam of light; [b] separating the initial beam oflight into two or more separate beams of colors whereby each separatebeam of color has the same single selected predetermined orientation ofa chosen component of the electric field vectors as that of the otherseparate beams of color and each separate beam of color having a colordifferent from the other separate beams of colors; [c] altering thesingle selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors of a plurality of portions of each separate beamof color by passing a plurality of portions of each separate beam ofcolor through a respective one of a plurality of altering means wherebythe single selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electric field vectors of the plurality of portions of each separatebeam of color is altered in response to a stimulus means by applying asignal means to the stimulus means in a predetermined manner as theplurality of portions of each of the substantially separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy passes through the respective one of theplurality of means for altering the single selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of the electric field vectors; [d]combining altered separate beams of color into a single collinear colorbeam without substantially changing the altered selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the separate beam of color; and [e]resolving from the single collinear color beam a first resolved colorbeam having substantially a first single selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of the electric field vectors andsecond resolved color beam having substantially a second single selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electric fieldvectors, whereby the first and second single selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors aredifferent from one another.
 159. A method as described in claim 158which further comprises the step of passing one of the resolved colorbeams to a projection means.
 160. A method as described in claim 158 inwhich step [a] includes producing an initial collimated beam of lighthaving a substantially uniform flux intensity across substantially theentire initial collimated beam of light and substantially the samesingle selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of theelectric field vectors across substantially the entire initialcollimated beam of light.
 161. A method as described in claim 160 whichfurther includes the step of removing from the initial collimated beamof light at least a portion of ultraviolet and at least a portion ofinfrared to produce an initial collimated beam of white light anddirection the removed portions to a beam stop whereby the removedultraviolet and infrared is absorbed.
 162. A method as described inclaim 161 in which step [b] further includes the step of adjusting byremoving at least a predetermined portion of color of at least one ofthe separate collimated beams of color and directing the removed portionto a beam stop whereby the removed portion is absorbed.
 163. A method asdescribed in claim 159 in which step [a] includes producing an initialcollimated rectangular beam of light having a substantially uniform fluxintensity across substantially the entire initial collimated rectangularbeam of light and having substantially the same single selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electric fieldvectors across substantially the entire initial collimated rectangularbeam of light.
 164. A method as described in claim 163 which furtherincludes the step of removing from the initial collimated rectangularbeam of light at least a portion of ultraviolet and at least a portionof infrared to produce an initial collimated rectangular beam of whitelight and directing the removed portions to a beam stop whereby theremoved ultraviolet and infrared is absorbed.
 165. A method as describedin claim 164 in which step [b] further includes the step of adjusting byremoving at least a predetermined portion of color of at least one ofthe separate collimated rectangular beams of color and directing theremoved portion to a beam stop whereby the removed portion is absorbed.166. A system of producing a modulated beam of light suitable forprojection of video images, comprising: [a] means for producing aninitial beam of light; [b] means for separating the initial beam oflight into two or more separate beams of colors whereby each separatebeam of color has the same single selected predetermined orientation ofa chosen component of the electric field vectors as that of the otherseparate beams of color and each separate beam of color having a colordifferent from the other separate beams of colors; [c] means foraltering the single selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors of a plurality of portions ofeach separate beam of color by passing a plurality of portions of eachseparate beam of color through a respective one of a plurality ofaltering means whereby the single selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electric field vectors of the plurality ofportions of each separate beam of color is altered in response to astimulus means by applying a signal means to the stimulus means in apredetermined manner as the plurality of portions of each of thesubstantially separate beams of electromagnetic energy passes throughthe respective one of the plurality of means for altering the singleselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electricfield vectors; [d] means for combining altered separate beams of colorinto a single collinear color beam without substantially changing thealtered selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electric field vectors of the plurality of portions of each of theseparate beam of color; and [e] means for resolving from the singlecollinear color beam a first resolved color beam having substantially afirst single selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofthe electric field vectors and second resolved color beam havingsubstantially a second single selected predetermined, orientation of achosen component of the electric field vectors, whereby the first andsecond single selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electric field vectors are different from one another.
 167. Asystem as described in claim 166 which further comprises means forpassing one of the resolved color beams to a projection means.
 168. Asystem as described in claim 166 in which the means for producing aninitial beam of light includes producing an initial collimated beam oflight having a substantially uniform flux intensity across substantiallythe entire initial collimated beam of light and substantially the samesingle selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of theelectric field vectors across substantially the entire initialcollimated beam of light.
 169. A system as described in claim 168 whichfurther includes means for removing from the initial collimated beam oflight at least a portion of ultraviolet and at least a portion ofinfrared to produce an initial collimated beam of white light and meansfor directing the removed portions to a beam stop whereby the removedultraviolet and infrared is absorbed.
 170. A system as described inclaim 169 in which the means for separating the initial beam of lightinto two or more separate beams of light includes means for adjustingthe color by removing at least a predetermined portion of color of atleast one of the separate collimated beams of color and directing theremoved portion to a beam stop whereby the removed portion is absorbed.171. A system as described in claim 166 in which the means for producingan initial beam of light includes means for producing an initialcollimated rectangular beam of light having a substantially uniform fluxintensity across substantially the entire initial collimated rectangularbeam of light and having substantially the same single selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electric fieldvectors across substantially the entire initial collimated rectangularbeam of light.
 172. A system as described in claim 171 which furtherincludes means for removing from the initial collimated rectangular beamof light at least a portion of ultraviolet and at least a portion ofinfrared to produce an initial collimated rectangular beam of whitelight and directing the removed portions to a beam stop whereby theremoved ultraviolet and infrared is absorbed.
 173. A system as describedin claim 172 in which the means for separating the initial beam of lightinto two or more separate beams of color includes means for adjustingthe color by removing at least a predetermined portion of color of atleast one of the separate collimated rectangular beams of color anddirecting the removed portion to a beam stop whereby the removed portionis absorbed.
 174. A method of producing a modulated beam of lightsuitable for projection of video images, comprising: [a] providing afirst initial beam of light having randomly changing orientations of theselected component of the electric field vectors; [b] integrating thefirst initial beam of light to form a second initial beam of lighthaving a substantially uniform flux intensity across substantially theentire second initial beam of light; [c] collimating the second initialbeam of light into an initial collimated beam of light having randomlychanging orientations of the selected component of the electric fieldvectors and a substantially uniform flux intensity across substantiallythe entire second initial beam of light [d] removing from the initialcollimated beam of light at least a portion of ultraviolet and infraredto produce an initial collimated beam of white light and directing theremoved portions to a beam stop whereby the removed portion is absorbed;[e] resolving from the initial collimated beam of white light an initialcollimated first resolved beam of white light having substantially afirst single selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofthe electric field vectors and an initial collimated second resolvedbeam of white light having substantially a second single selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electric fieldvectors, whereby the first and second single selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors aredifferent from one another; [f] forming from the initial collimatedfirst resolved beam of white light and initial collimated secondresolved beam of white light a substantially collimated rectangularinitial single beam of white light having substantially the same singleselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electricfield vectors across substantially the entire beam of light and asubstantially uniform flux intensity across substantially the entireinitial collimated single beam of white light; [g] separating thecollimated rectangular initial single beam of white light into two ormore separate collimated rectangular beams of color whereby each of theseparate collimated rectangular beam of color has the same singleselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electricfield vectors as that of the other separate collimated rectangular beamsof colors and each separate collimated rectangular beam of color havinga different color from the other separate collimated rectangular beamsof colors; [h] adjusting the color by removing at least a predeterminedportion of color of at least one of the separate collimated rectangularbeam of colors and directing the removed portion to a beam stop wherebythe removed portion is absorbed; [i] altering the single selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors of a plurality of portions of each separate collimatedrectangular beam of color by passing a plurality of portions of eachseparate collimated rectangular beam of color through a respective oneof a plurality of altering means whereby the single selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors of the plurality of portions of each separate beam of color isaltered in response to a stimulus means by applying a signal means tothe stimulus means in a predetermined manner as the plurality ofportions of each of the substantially collimated separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy passes through the respective one of theplurality of altering the single selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of the electric field vectors; [j] combining thealtered separate collimated rectangular beams of color into a singlecollimated rectangular collinear color beam without substantiallychanging the altered selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors of the plurality of portions ofeach separate collimated rectangular beam of color; [k] resolving fromthe single collimated rectangular collinear color beam a firstcollimated rectangular resolved color beam having substantially a firstsingle selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of theelectric field vectors and second collimated rectangular resolved colorbeam having substantially a second single selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of the electric field vectors, wherebythe first and second single selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electric field vectors are different from oneanother; and [l] passing one of the first collimated rectangular orsecond collimated rectangular resolved color beam to a projection means.175. A system of producing a modulated beam of light suitable forprojection of video images, comprising: [a] means for providing a firstinitial beam of light having randomly changing orientations of theselected component of the electric field vectors; [b] means forintegrating the first initial beam of light to form a second initialbeam of light having a substantially uniform flux intensity acrosssubstantially the entire second initial beam of light; [c] means forcollimating the second initial beam of light into an initial collimatedbeam of light having randomly changing orientations of the selectedcomponent of the electric field vectors and a substantially uniform fluxintensity across substantially the entire second initial beam of light;[d] means for removing from the initial collimated beam of light atleast a portion of ultraviolet and infrared to produce an initialcollimated beam of white light and directing the removed portions to abeam stop whereby the removed portion is absorbed; [e] means forresolving from the initial collimated beam of white light an initialcollimated first resolved beam of white light having substantially afirst single selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofthe electric field vectors and an initial collimated second resolvedbeam of white light having substantially a second single selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electric fieldvectors, whereby the first and second single selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors aredifferent from one another; [f] means for forming from the initialcollimated first resolved beam of white light and initial collimatedsecond resolved beam of white light a substantially collimatedrectangular initial single beam of white light having substantially thesame single selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofthe electric field vectors across substantially the entire beam of lightand a substantially uniform flux intensity across substantially theentire initial collimated single beam of white light; [g] means forseparating the collimated rectangular initial single beam of white lightinto two or more separate collimated rectangular beams of color wherebyeach of the separate collimated rectangular beam of color has the samesingle selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of theelectric field vectors as that of the other separate collimatedrectangular beams of colors and each separate collimated rectangularbeam of color having a different color from the other separatecollimated rectangular beams of colors; [h] means for adjusting thecolor by removing at least a predetermined portion of color of at leastone of the separate collimated rectangular beam of colors and directingthe removed portion to a beam stop whereby the removed portion isabsorbed; [i] means for altering the single selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of aplurality of portions of each separate collimated rectangular beam ofcolor by passing a plurality of portions of each separate collimatedrectangular beam of color through a respective one of a plurality ofaltering means whereby the single selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electric field vectors of the plurality ofportions of each separate beam of color is altered in response to astimulus means by applying a signal means to the stimulus means in apredetermined manner as the plurality of portions of each of thesubstantially collimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy passesthrough the respective one of the plurality of altering the singleselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electricfield vectors; [j] means for combining the altered separate collimatedrectangular beams of color into a single collimated rectangularcollinear color beam without substantially changing the altered selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors of the plurality of portions of each separate collimatedrectangular beam of color; [k] means for resolving from the singlecollimated rectangular collinear color beam a first collimatedrectangular resolved color beam having substantially a first singleselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electricfield vectors and second collimated rectangular resolved color beamhaving substantially a second single selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of the electric field vectors, whereby the firstand second single selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors are different from one another;and [l] means for passing one of the first collimated rectangular orsecond collimated rectangular resolved color beam to a projection means.176. A method of producing a collinear beam of electromagnetic energyhaving two constituent parts, comprising: [a] providing a substantiallycollimated primary beam of electromagnetic energy having a predeterminedrange of wavelengths and randomly changing orientations of a chosencomponent of electromagnetic wave field vectors; [b] resolving thesubstantially collimated primary beam of electromagnetic energy into asubstantially collimated primary first resolved beam of electromagneticenergy having substantially a first selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors and asubstantially collimated primary second resolved beam of electromagneticenergy having substantially a second selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors; [c]separating each of the substantially collimated primary resolved beamsof electromagnetic energy into two or more substantially collimatedseparate beams of electromagnetic energy, each of the substantiallycollimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy having a selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors; [d] altering the selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of aplurality of portions of each of the substantially collimated separatebeams of electromagnetic energy by passing the plurality of portions ofeach of the substantially collimated separate beams of electromagneticenergy through a respective one of a plurality of altering means wherebythe selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors of the plurality of portions of eachof the substantially collimated separate beams of electromagnetic energyis altered in response to a stimulus means by applying a signal means tothe stimulus means in a predetermined manner as the plurality ofportions of each of the substantially collimated separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy passes through the respective one of theplurality of means for altering the selected predetermined orientationof the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors; [e][i] combining the substantially collimated altered separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy of the primary first resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy into a first substantially collimated singlecollinear beam of electromagnetic energy without substantially changingthe altered selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electromagnetic wave field vectors of the plurality of portionsof each of the substantially collimated separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy, and [ii] combining the substantially collimatedaltered separate beams of electromagnetic energy of the primary secondresolved beam of electromagnetic energy into a second substantiallycollimated single collinear beam of electromagnetic energy withoutsubstantially changing the altered selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the substantially collimated separatebeams of electromagnetic energy; [f] [i] resolving from the firstsubstantially collimated single collinear beam of electromagnetic energya substantially collimated first resolved beam of electromagnetic energyhaving substantially the first selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors and asubstantially collimated second resolved beam of electromagnetic energyhaving substantially the second selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors, and [ii]resolving from the second substantially collimated single collinear beamof electromagnetic energy a substantially collimated first resolved beamof electromagnetic energy having substantially the first selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors and a substantially collimated second resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy having substantially the second selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors; and [g] merging one of the resolved beams ofelectromagnetic energy from the first substantially collimated singlecollinear beam of electromagnetic energy with one of the other resolvedbeams of electromagnetic energy from the second substantially collimatedsingle collinear beam of electromagnetic energy into a substantiallycollimated third single collinear beam of electromagnetic energy.
 177. Amethod as described in claim 176 wherein step [b] further includesresolving the primary beam into first and second resolved beams in whichthe first selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electromagnetic wave field vectors has the same selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors as that of the second selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors.
 178. A method as described in claim 176 wherein step [b]further includes resolving the primary beam into first and secondresolved beams in which the first selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors has theselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors different from the second selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors.
 179. A method as described in claim 176 wherein step[g] further includes the merging of the resolved beams in which theplurality of portions of one of the merged beams has a differentselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors as that of the plurality of portionsof the other merged beam.
 180. A method as described in claim 176wherein step [g] further includes merging of the resolved beams in whicheach merged beam has its plurality of portions parallel andnoncoincident to the plurality of portions as that of the other mergedbeam.
 181. A method as described in claim 176 wherein step [g] furtherincludes merging of the resolved beams in which each merged beam has itsplurality of portions parallel and partially coincident to the pluralityof portions as that of the other merged beam.
 182. A method as describedin claim 176 wherein step [g] further includes merging of the resolvedbeams in which each merged beam has its plurality of portions paralleland simultaneous to the plurality of portions as that of the othermerged beam.
 183. A method as described in claim 176 wherein step [g]further includes merging of the resolved beams in which each merged beamhas its plurality of portions parallel, noncoincident and simultaneousto the plurality of portions as that of the other merged beam.
 184. Amethod as described in claim 176 wherein step [g] further includesmerging of the resolved beams in which each merged beam has itsplurality of portions parallel, partially coincident and simultaneous tothe plurality of portions as that of the other merged beam.
 185. Amethod as described in claim 176 wherein step [g] further includesmerging of the resolved beams in which the plurality of portions of oneof the merged beams has the substantially same selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectorsas that of the plurality of portions of the other merged beam.
 186. Amethod as described in claim 176 wherein step [g] further includesmerging of the resolved beams in which the plurality of portions of oneof the merged beams has the substantially same selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectorsas that of the plurality of portions of the other merged beam andfurther includes each merged beam having its plurality of portionsparallel and noncoincident to the plurality of portions as that of theother merged beam.
 187. A method as described in claim 176 wherein step[g] further includes merging of the resolved beams in which theplurality of portions of one of the merged beams has the substantiallysame selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors as that of the plurality of portionsof the other merged beam and further includes each merged beam havingits plurality of portions parallel and partially coincident to theplurality of portions as that of the other merged beam.
 188. A method asdescribed in claim 176 wherein step [g] further includes merging of theresolved beams in which the plurality of portions of one of the mergedbeams has the substantially same selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors as that of theplurality of portions of the other merged beam and further includes eachmerged beam having its plurality of portions parallel and simultaneousto the plurality of portions as that of the other merged beam.
 189. Amethod as described in claim 176 further comprising the step of passingthe substantially collimated third single collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy to a projection means.
 190. A method of producinga collinear beam of light having two constituent parts, comprising: [a]providing a substantially collimated primary beam of light having apredetermined range of wavelengths and randomly changing orientations ofa chosen component of electric field vectors; [b] resolving thesubstantially collimated primary beam of light into a substantiallycollimated primary first resolved beam of light having substantially afirst selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of theelectric field vectors and a substantially collimated primary secondresolved beam of light having substantially a second selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electric fieldvectors; [c] separating each of the substantially collimated primaryresolved beams of light into two or more substantially collimatedseparate beams of light, each of the substantially collimated separatebeams of light having a selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electric field vectors; [d] altering the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors of a plurality of portions of each of the substantiallycollimated separate beams of light by passing the plurality of portionsof each of the substantially collimated separate beams of light througha respective one of a plurality of altering means whereby the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors of the plurality of portions of each of the substantiallycollimated separate beams of light is altered in response to a stimulusmeans by applying a signal means to the stimulus means in apredetermined manner as the plurality of portions of each of thesubstantially collimated separate beams of light passes through therespective one of the plurality of means for altering the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors; [e] [i] combining the substantially collimated altered separatebeams of light of the primary first resolved beam of light into a firstsubstantially collimated single collinear beam of light withoutsubstantially changing the altered selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electric field vectors of the plurality ofportions of each of the substantially collimated separate beams oflight, and [ii] combining the substantially collimated altered separatebeams of light of the primary second resolved beam of light into asecond substantially collimated single collinear beam of light withoutsubstantially changing the altered selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electric field vectors of the plurality ofportions of each of the substantially collimated separate beams oflight; [f] [i] resolving from the first substantially collimated singlecollinear beam of light a substantially collimated first resolved beamof light having substantially a first selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of electric field vectors and a substantiallycollimated second resolved beam of light having substantially a secondselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of electricfield vectors, and [ii] resolving from the second substantiallycollimated single collinear beam of light a substantially collimatedfirst resolved beam of light having substantially a first selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors and a substantially collimated second resolved beam of lighthaving substantially a second selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electric field vectors; and [g] merging one of theresolved beams of light from the first substantially collimated singlecollinear beam of light with one of the other resolved beams of lightfrom the second substantially collimated single collinear beam of lightinto a substantially collimated third single collinear beam of light.191. A method as described in claim 190 wherein step [b] furtherincludes resolving the primary beam in which the first selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors has the same selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors as that of the second selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors.
 192. A method as described in claim 190 wherein step [b]further includes resolving the primary beam in which the first selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors has the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors different from the secondselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors.
 193. A method as described in claim 190 whereinstep [g] further includes resolving the primary beam in which theplurality of portions of one of the merged beams has a differentselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of electricfield vectors from that of the plurality of portions of the other mergedbeam.
 194. A method as described in claim 190 wherein step [g] furtherincludes each merged beam having its plurality of portions parallel andnoncoincident to the plurality of portions as that of the other mergedbeam.
 195. A method as described in claim 190 wherein step [g] furtherincludes resolving the primary beam in which each merged beam has theplurality of portions parallel and partially coincident to the pluralityof portions of the other merged beam.
 196. A method as described inclaim 190 wherein step [g] further includes resolving the primary beamin which each merged beam has its plurality of portions parallel andsimultaneous to the plurality of portions of the other merged beam. 197.A method as described in claim 190 wherein step [g] further includesresolving the primary beam in which each merged beam has its pluralityof portions parallel, noncoincident and simultaneous to the plurality ofportions of the other merged beam.
 198. A method as described in claim190 wherein step [g] further includes resolving the primary beam inwhich each merged beam has its plurality of portions parallel, partiallycoincident and simultaneous to the plurality of portions as that of theother merged beam.
 199. A method as described in claim 190 wherein step[g] further includes resolving the primary beam in which the pluralityof portions of one of the merged beams has the substantially sameselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of electricfield vectors as that of the plurality of portions of the other mergedbeam.
 200. A method as described in claim 190 wherein step [g] furtherincludes resolving the primary beam in which the plurality of portionsof one of the merged beams has the substantially same selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors as that of the plurality of portions of the other merged beamand further includes each merged beam having its plurality of portionsparallel and noncoincident to the plurality of portions of the othermerged beam.
 201. A method as described in claim 190 wherein step [g]further includes resolving the primary beam in which the plurality ofportions of one of the merged beams has the substantially same selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors as that of the plurality of portions of the other merged beamand further includes each merged beam having its plurality of portionsparallel and partially coincident to the plurality of portions of theother merged beam.
 202. A method as described in claim 190 wherein step[g] further includes resolving the primary beam in which the pluralityof portions of one of the merged beams has the substantially sameselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of electricfield vectors as that of the plurality of portions of the other mergedbeam and further includes each merged beam having its plurality ofportions parallel and simultaneous to the plurality of portions of theother merged beam.
 203. A method as described in claim 190 furthercomprising the step of passing the substantially collimated third singlecollinear beam of light to a projection means.
 204. A method asdescribed in claim 190 wherein step [a] includes producing an initialbeam of ultraviolet.
 205. A system of producing a collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy having two constituent parts, comprising: [a]means for providing a substantially collimated primary beam ofelectromagnetic energy having a predetermined range of wavelengths andhaving randomly changing orientations of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors; [b] means for resolving thesubstantially collimated primary beam of electromagnetic energy into asubstantially collimated primary first resolved beam of electromagneticenergy having substantially a first selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors and asubstantially collimated primary second resolved beam of electromagneticenergy having substantially a second elected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors; [c]means for separating each of the substantially collimated primaryresolved beams of electromagnetic energy into two or more substantiallycollimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy, each of thesubstantially collimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy havinga selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors; [d] means for altering the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors of a plurality of portions of each of thesubstantially collimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy bypassing the plurality of portions of each of the substantiallycollimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy through a respectiveone of a plurality of altering means whereby the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors of the plurality of portions of each of the substantiallycollimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy is altered inresponse to a stimulus means by applying a signal means to the stimulusmeans in a predetermined manner as the plurality of portions of each ofthe substantially collimated separate beams of electromagnetic energypasses through the respective one of the plurality of means for alteringthe selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors; [e] [i] means for combining thesubstantially collimated altered separate beams of electromagneticenergy of the primary first resolved beam of electromagnetic energy intoa first substantially collimated single collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy without substantially changing the alteredselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors of the plurality of portions of eachof the substantially collimated separate beams of electromagneticenergy, and [ii] means for combining the substantially collimatedaltered separate beams of electromagnetic energy of the primary secondresolved beam of electromagnetic energy into a second substantiallycollimated single collinear beam of electromagnetic energy withoutsubstantially changing the altered selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the substantially collimated separatebeams of electromagnetic energy; [f] [i] means for resolving from thefirst substantially collimated single collinear beam of electromagneticenergy a substantially collimated first resolved beam of electromagneticenergy having substantially a first selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors and asubstantially collimated second resolved beam of electromagnetic energyhaving substantially a second selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors, and [ii] meansfor resolving from the second substantially collimated single collinearbeam of electromagnetic energy a substantially collimated first resolvedbeam of electromagnetic energy having substantially a first selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors and a substantially collimated second resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy having substantially a second selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors; and [g] means for merging one of the resolved beams ofelectromagnetic energy from the first substantially collimated singlecollinear beam of electromagnetic energy with one of the other resolvedbeams of electromagnetic energy from the second substantially collimatedsingle collinear beam of electromagnetic energy into a substantiallycollimated third single collinear beam of electromagnetic energy.
 206. Asystem as described in claim 205 wherein the means for resolving thesubstantially collimated primary beam includes means for resolving thesubstantially collimated primary beam into substantially collimatedprimary first and second resolved beams in which the first selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors of the first resolved beam has the same selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors as that of the second selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors of the second resolved beam.
 207. A system as described in claim205 wherein the means for resolving the substantially collimated primarybeam includes means for resolving the substantially collimated primarybeam into substantially collimated primary first and second resolvedbeams in which the first selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of the firstresolved beam has the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors different from thesecond selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors of the second resolved beam.
 208. Asystem as described in claim 205 wherein the means for merging of theresolved beams includes means for merging of the resolved beams in whichthe plurality of portions of one of the merged beams has a differentselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors from that of the plurality ofportions of the other merged beam.
 209. A system as described in claim205 wherein the means for merging of the resolved beams includes meansfor merging of the resolved beams in which each merged beam has itsplurality of portions parallel and noncoincident to the plurality ofportions of the other merged beam.
 210. A system as described in claim205 wherein the means for merging of the resolved beams includes meansfor merging of the resolved beams in which each merged beam has itsplurality of portions parallel and partially coincident to the pluralityof portions of the other merged beam.
 211. A system as described inclaim 205 wherein the means for merging of the resolved beams includesmeans for merging of the resolved beams in which each merged beam hasits plurality of portions parallel and simultaneous to the plurality ofportions of the other merged beam.
 212. A system as described in claim205 wherein the means for merging of the resolved beams includes meansfor merging of the resolved beams in which each merged beam has itsplurality of portions parallel, noncoincident and simultaneous to theplurality of portions of the other merged beam.
 213. A system asdescribed in claim 205 wherein the means for merging of the resolvedbeams includes means for merging of the resolved beams in which eachmerged beam has its plurality of portions parallel, partially coincidentand simultaneous to the plurality of portions of the other merged beam.214. A system as described in claim 205 wherein the means for merging ofthe resolved beams includes means for merging of the resolved beams inwhich the plurality of portions of one of the merged beams has thesubstantially same selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electromagnetic wave field vectors as that of the pluralityof portions of the other merged beam.
 215. A system as described inclaim 205 wherein the means for merging of the resolved beams includesmeans for merging of the resolved beams in which the plurality ofportions of one of the merged beams has the substantially same selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors as that of the plurality of portions of the other mergedbeam and each merged beam has its plurality of portions parallel andnoncoincident to the plurality of portions of the other merged beam.216. A system as described in claim 205 wherein the means for merging ofthe resolved beams includes means for merging of the resolved beams inwhich the plurality of portions of one of the merged beams has thesubstantially same selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electromagnetic wave field vectors as that of the pluralityof portions of the other merged beam and each merged beam has itsplurality of portions parallel and partially coincident to the pluralityof portions of the other merged beam.
 217. A system of producing acollinear beam of light having two constituent parts, comprising: [a]means for providing a substantially collimated primary beam of lighthaving a predetermined range of wavelengths and having randomly changingorientations of a chosen component of electric field vectors; [b] meansfor resolving the substantially collimated primary beam of light into asubstantially collimated primary first resolved beam of light havingsubstantially a first selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of the electric field vectors and a substantially collimatedprimary second resolved beam of light having substantially a secondselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electricfield vectors; [c] means for separating each of the substantiallycollimated primary resolved beams of light into two or moresubstantially collimated separate beams of light, each of thesubstantially collimated separate beams of light having a selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors; [d] means for altering the selected predetermined orientationof the chosen component of the electric field vectors of a plurality ofportions of each of the substantially collimated separate beams of lightby passing the plurality of portions of each of the substantiallycollimated separate beams of light through a respective one of aplurality of altering means whereby the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the substantially collimated separatebeams of light is altered in response to a stimulus means by applying asignal means to the stimulus means in a predetermined manner as theplurality of portions of each of the substantially collimated separatebeams of light passes through the respective one of the plurality ofmeans for altering the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors; [e] [i] means for combining thesubstantially collimated altered separate beams of light of the primaryfirst resolved beam of light into a first substantially collimatedsingle collinear beam of light without substantially changing thealtered selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electric field vectors of the plurality of portions of each of thesubstantially collimated separate beams of light, and [ii] means forcombining the substantially collimated altered separate beams of lightof the primary second resolved beam of light into a second substantiallycollimated single collinear beam of light without substantially changingthe altered selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electric field vectors of the plurality of portions of each ofthe substantially collimated separate beams of light; [f] [i] means forresolving from the first substantially collimated single collinear beamof light a substantially collimated first resolved beam of light havingsubstantially a first selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electric field vectors and a substantially collimatedsecond resolved beam of light having substantially a second selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors, and [ii] means for resolving from the second substantiallycollimated single collinear beam of light a substantially collimatedfirst resolved beam of light having substantially a first selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors and a substantially collimated second resolved beam of lighthaving substantially a second selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electric field vectors; and [g] means for mergingone of the resolved beams of light from the first substantiallycollimated single collinear beam of light with one of the other resolvedbeams of light from the second substantially collimated single collinearbeam of light into a substantially collimated third single collinearbeam of light.
 218. A system as described in claim 217 wherein the meansfor merging of the resolved beams includes means for merging of theresolved beams in which the plurality of portions of one of the mergedbeams has the substantially same selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electric field vectors as that of the plurality ofportions of the other merged beam and each merged beam has its pluralityof portions parallel and simultaneous to the plurality of portions ofthe other merged beam.
 219. A system as described in claim 217 whereinthe means for resolving the substantially collimated primary beamincludes means for resolving the substantially collimated primary beaminto substantially collimated primary first and second resolved beams inwhich the first selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors of the first resolved beam hasthe same selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electric field vectors as that of the second selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of thesecond resolved beam.
 220. A system as described in claim 217 whereinthe means for resolving the substantially collimated primary beamincludes means for resolving the substantially collimated primary beaminto substantially collimated primary first and second resolved beams inwhich the first selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors of the first resolved beam hasthe selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors different from the second selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of thesecond resolved beam.
 221. A system as described in claim 217 whereinthe means for merging of the resolved beams includes means for mergingof the resolved beams in which the plurality of portions of one of themerged beams has a different selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electric field vectors from that of the plurality ofportions of the other merged beam.
 222. A system as described in claim217 wherein the means for merging of the resolved beams includes meansfor merging of the resolved beams in which each merged beam has itsplurality of portions parallel and noncoincident to the plurality ofportions of the other merged beam.
 223. A system as described in claim217 wherein the means for merging of the resolved beams includes meansfor merging of the resolved beams in which each merged beam has itsplurality of portions parallel and partially coincident to the pluralityof portions of the other merged beam.
 224. A system as described inclaim 217 wherein the means for merging of the resolved beams includesmeans for merging of the resolved beams in which each merged beam hasits plurality of portions parallel and simultaneous to the plurality ofportions of the other merged beam.
 225. A system as described in claim217 wherein the means for merging of the resolved beams includes meansfor merging of the resolved beams in which each merged beam has itsplurality of portions parallel, noncoincident and simultaneous to theplurality of portions of the other merged beam.
 226. A system asdescribed in claim 217 wherein the means for merging of the resolvedbeams includes means for merging of the resolved beams in which eachmerged beam has its plurality of portions parallel, partially coincidentand simultaneous to the plurality of portions of the other merged beam.227. A system as described in claim 217 wherein the means for merging ofthe resolved beams includes means for merging of the resolved beams inwhich the plurality of portions of one of the merged beams has thesubstantially same selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electric field vectors as that of the plurality of portionsof the other merged beam.
 228. A system as described in claim 217wherein the means for merging of the resolved beams includes means formerging of the resolved beams in which the plurality of portions of oneof the merged beams has the substantially same selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electric field vectors as that ofthe plurality of portions of the other merged beam and each merged beamhas its plurality of portions parallel and noncoincident to theplurality of portions of the other merged beam.
 229. A system asdescribed in claim 217 wherein the means for merging of the resolvedbeams includes means for merging of the resolved beams in which theplurality of portions of one of the merged beams has the substantiallysame selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectric field vectors as that of the plurality of portions of the othermerged beam and each merged beam has its plurality of portions paralleland partially coincident to the plurality of portions of the othermerged beam.
 230. A system as described in claim 43 wherein the meansfor merging of the resolved beams includes means for merging of theresolved beams in which the plurality of portions of one of the mergedbeams has the substantially same selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electric field vectors as that of the plurality ofportions of the other merged beam and further includes each merged beamhaving its plurality of portions parallel and simultaneous to theplurality of portions as that of the other merged beam.
 231. A system asdescribed in claim 217 further comprising means for passing thesubstantially collimated third single collinear beam of light to aprojection means.
 232. A system as described in claim 205 wherein themeans for providing a substantially collimated primary beam includesproviding an initial beam of ultraviolet.
 233. A method of producing amodulated beam of electromagnetic energy, comprising: [a] providing aprimary beam of electromagnetic energy having a predetermined range ofwavelengths and randomly changing orientations of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors; [b] resolving the primary beam ofelectromagnetic energy into a primary first resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy having substantially a first selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors and a primary second resolved beam of electromagneticenergy having substantially a second selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors; [c]separating each of the primary resolved beams of electromagnetic energyinto two or more separate beams of electromagnetic energy, each of theseparate beams of electromagnetic energy having a selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors;[d] altering the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of a plurality ofportions of each of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy bypassing the plurality of portions of each of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy through a respective one of a plurality ofaltering means whereby the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the separate beams of electromagneticenergy is altered in response to a stimulus means by applying a signalmeans to the stimulus means in a predetermined manner as the pluralityof portions of each of the separate beams of electromagnetic energypasses through the respective one of the plurality of means for alteringthe selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors; [e] [i] combining the alteredseparate beams of electromagnetic energy of the primary first resolvedbeam of electromagnetic energy into a first single collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy without substantially changing the alteredselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors of the plurality of portions of eachof the separate beams of electromagnetic energy, and [ii] combining thealtered separate beams of electromagnetic energy of the primary secondresolved beam of electromagnetic energy into a second single collinearbeam of electromagnetic energy without substantially changing thealtered selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electromagnetic wave field vectors of the plurality of portions ofeach of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy; and [f] [i]resolving from the first single collinear beam of electromagnetic energya first resolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially afirst selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors and a second resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy having substantially a second selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors, and [ii] resolving from the second single collinear beamof electromagnetic energy a first resolved beam of electromagneticenergy having substantially a first selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors and a secondresolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially a secondselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors.
 234. A method as described in claim233 wherein step [a] includes providing a substantially collimatedprimary beam of electromagnetic energy.
 235. A method as described inclaim 233 wherein step [a] includes providing a primary beam ofelectromagnetic energy having a rectangular cross sectional area.
 236. Amethod as described in claim 233 wherein step [a] includes providing aprimary initial beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially thesame selected predetermined orientation for the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors substantially across the beam.
 237. Amethod as described in claim 233 wherein step [b] includes resolving theprimary beam into primary first and second resolved beams in which eachof the resolved beams of electromagnetic energy has the substantiallysame selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors substantially across each of theresolved beams of electromagnetic energy as that of the other resolvedbeams of electromagnetic energy.
 238. A method as described in claim 233wherein step [b] includes resolving the primary beam into primary firstand second resolved beams in which the first selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors has the same selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of the secondselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors.
 239. A method as described in claim233 further comprising the step of passing at least one of the resolvedbeams of electromagnetic energy from step [f] to a projection means.240. A method as described in claim 233 further comprising the step ofpassing one of the resolved beams of electromagnetic energy from step[f] [i] to a first projection means and passing one of the resolvedbeams of electromagnetic energy from step [f] [ii] to a secondprojection means.
 241. A method as described in claim 233 furthercomprising the step of adjusting the electromagnetic spectrum of atleast one of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy.
 242. A methodas described in claim 241 wherein the step of adjusting theelectromagnetic spectrum of at least one of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy includes adjusting the predetermined range ofwavelengths of at least one of the separate beams of electromagneticenergy.
 243. A method as described in claim 241 wherein the step ofadjusting the electromagnetic spectrum of at least one of the separatebeams of electromagnetic energy includes adjusting the magnitude of atleast one of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy.
 244. A methodas described in claim 233 wherein step [c] includes separating each ofthe primary resolved beams into two or more separate beams in which eachof the separate beams of electromagnetic energy has the electromagneticspectrum different from the other separate beams of electromagneticenergy.
 245. A method as described in claim 244 wherein step [c]includes separating each of the primary resolved beams into two or moreseparate beams in which each of the separate beams of electromagneticenergy has a predetermined range of wavelengths different from the otherseparate beams of electromagnetic energy.
 246. A method as described inclaim 244 further comprising the step of adjusting the magnitude of atleast one of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy from step [c].247. A method of producing a modulated beam of light, comprising: [a]providing a primary beam of light having a predetermined range ofwavelengths and randomly changing orientations of a chosen component ofelectric field vectors; [b] resolving the primary beam of light into aprimary first resolved beam of light having substantially a firstselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electricfield vectors and a primary second resolved beam of light havingsubstantially a second selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of the electric field vectors; [c] separating each of theprimary resolved beams of light into two or more separate beams oflight, each of the separate beams of light having a selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors; [d] altering the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electric field vectors of a plurality ofportions of each of the separate beams of light by passing the pluralityof portions of each of the separate beams of light through a respectiveone of a plurality of altering means whereby the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the separate beams of light is alteredin response to a stimulus means by applying a signal means to thestimulus means in a predetermined manner as the plurality of portions ofeach of the separate beams of light passes through the respective one ofthe plurality of means for altering the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors; [e][i] combining the altered separate beams of light of the primary firstresolved beam of light into a first single collinear beam of lightwithout substantially changing the altered selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the separate beams of light, and [ii]combining the altered separate beams of light of the primary secondresolved beam of light into a second single collinear beam of lightwithout substantially changing the altered selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the separate beams of light; and [f][i] resolving from the first single collinear beam of light a firstresolved beam of light having substantially a first selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors and a second resolved beam of light having substantially asecond selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectric field vectors, and [ii] resolving from the second singlecollinear beam of light a first resolved beam of light havingsubstantially a first selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electric field vectors and a second resolved beam of lighthaving substantially a second selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electric field vectors.
 248. A method as describedin claim 247 wherein step [a] includes providing a substantiallycollimated primary beam of light.
 249. A method as described in claim247 wherein step [a] includes providing the primary of light having arectangular cross sectional area.
 250. A method as described in claim247 wherein step [a] includes providing a primary beam of light havingsubstantially the same selected predetermined orientation for the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors substantially across the beam.251. A method as described in claim 247 wherein step [b] includesresolving the primary beam into primary first and second resolved beamsin which each of the resolved beams of light has the substantially sameselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors substantially across each of the resolved beamsof light as that of the other resolved beams of light.
 252. A method asdescribed in claim 247 wherein step [b] includes resolving the primarybeam into primary first and second resolved beams in which the firstselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors has the same selected predetermined orientationof the chosen component of the electric field vectors of the secondselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors.
 253. A method as described in claim 247 furthercomprising the step of passing at least one of the resolved beams oflight from step [f] to a projection means.
 254. A method as described inclaim 247 further comprising the step of passing one of the resolvedbeams of light from step [f] [i] to a first projection means and passingone of the resolved beams of light from step [f] [ii] to a secondprojection means.
 255. A method as described in claim 247 furthercomprising the step of adjusting the light spectrum of at least one ofthe separate beams of light.
 256. A method as described in claim 255wherein the step of adjusting the electromagnetic spectrum of at leastone of the separate beams of light includes adjusting the predeterminedrange of wavelengths of at least one of the separate beams of light.257. A method as described in claim 255 wherein the step of adjustingthe electromagnetic spectrum of at least one of the separate beams oflight includes adjusting a magnitude of at least one of the separatebeams of light.
 258. A method as described in claim 247 wherein step [c]includes separating each of the primary resolved beams into two or moreseparate beams in which each of the separate beams of light further hasthe light spectrum different from the other separate beams of light.259. A method as described in claim 258 wherein step [c] includesseparating each of the primary resolved beams into two or more separatebeams in which each of the separate beams of light has a predeterminedrange of wavelengths different from the other separate beams of light.260. A method as described in claim 258 further comprising the step ofadjusting the magnitude of at least one of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy from step [c].
 261. A system of producing amodulated beam of electromagnetic energy, comprising: [a] means forproviding a primary beam of electromagnetic energy having apredetermined range of wavelengths and randomly changing orientations ofa chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors; [b] means forresolving the primary beam of electromagnetic energy into a primaryfirst resolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially afirst selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors and a primary second resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy having substantially a second selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors; [c] means for separating each of the primaryresolved beams of electromagnetic energy into two or more separate beamsof electromagnetic energy, each of the separate beams of electromagneticenergy having a selected predetermined orientation of a chosen componentof electromagnetic wave field vectors; [d] means for altering theselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors of a plurality of portions of each ofthe separate beams of electromagnetic energy by passing the plurality ofportions of each of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy througha respective one of a plurality of altering means whereby the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors of the plurality of portions of each of the separatebeams of electromagnetic energy is altered in response to a stimulusmeans by applying a signal means to the stimulus means in apredetermined manner as the plurality of portions of each of theseparate beams of electromagnetic energy passes through the respectiveone of the plurality of means for altering the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors; [e] [i] means for combining the altered separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy of the primary first resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy into a first single collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy without substantially changing the alteredselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors of the plurality of portions of eachof the separate beams of electromagnetic energy, and [ii] means forcombining the altered separate beams of electromagnetic energy of theprimary second resolved beam of electromagnetic energy into a secondsingle collinear beam of electromagnetic energy without substantiallychanging the altered selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of the plurality ofportions of each of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy; and[f] [i] means for resolving from the first single collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy a first resolved beam of electromagnetic energyhaving substantially a first selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors and a secondresolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially a secondselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors, and [ii] means for resolving fromthe second single collinear beam of electromagnetic energy a firstresolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially a firstselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors and a second resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy having substantially a second selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors.
 262. A system as described in claim 261 in which themeans for providing a primary beam of electromagnetic energy includesmeans for providing a substantially collimated beam of electromagneticenergy.
 263. A system as described in claim 261 in which the means forproviding a primary beam of electromagnetic energy includes means forproviding the initial beam of electromagnetic energy having arectangular cross sectional area.
 264. A system as described in claim261 in which the means for providing a primary beam of electromagneticenergy includes means for providing an initial beam of electromagneticenergy having substantially the same selected predetermined orientationfor the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectorssubstantially across the beam.
 265. A system as described in claim 261in which the means for resolving the primary beam of electromagneticenergy into primary first and second resolved beams of electromagneticenergy includes means for resolving the primary beam of electromagneticenergy into primary first and second resolved beams of electromagneticenergy with the resolved beams of electromagnetic energy having thesubstantially same selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors substantially acrosseach of the resolved beams of electromagnetic energy as that of theocher resolved beams of electromagnetic energy.
 266. A system asdescribed in claim 261 in which the means for resolving the primary beamof electromagnetic energy into primary first and second resolved beamsof electromagnetic energy includes means for resolving the primary beamof electromagnetic energy into primary first and second resolved beamsof electromagnetic energy with the first selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors having the same selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors as that of thesecond selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors.
 267. A system as described in claim261, further comprising means for passing at least one of the resolvedbeams of electromagnetic energy from step [f] to a projection means.268. A system as described in claim 261 further comprising means forpassing one of the resolved beams of electromagnetic energy from step[f] [i] to a first projection means and passing one of the resolvedbeams of electromagnetic energy from step [f] [ii] to a secondprojection means.
 269. A system as described in claim 261 furthercomprising the means for adjusting the electromagnetic spectrum of atleast one of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy.
 270. A systemas described in claim 269 wherein the means for adjusting theelectromagnetic spectrum of at least one of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy includes means for adjusting a predeterminedrange of wavelengths of at least one of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy.
 271. A system as described in claim 269 whereinthe means for adjusting the electromagnetic spectrum of at least one ofthe separate beams of electromagnetic energy includes the means foradjusting a magnitude of at least one of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy.
 272. A system as described in claim 261 whereinthe separating means includes means for separating the beams in whicheach of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy has anelectromagnetic spectrum different from the electromagnetic spectrum ofeach of the other separate beams of electromagnetic energy.
 273. Asystem as described in claim 272 wherein the separating means includesmeans for separating the beams in which each of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy has a predetermined range of wavelengthsdifferent from a predetermined range of wavelengths of each of the otherseparate beams of electromagnetic energy.
 274. A system as described inclaim 272 further comprising the means for the magnitude of at least oneof the separate beams of electromagnetic energy.
 275. A system ofproducing a modulated beam of light, comprising: [a] means for providinga primary beam of light having a predetermined range of wavelengths andrandomly changing orientations of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors; [b] means for resolving the primary beam of light into aprimary first resolved beam of light having substantially a firstselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electricfield vectors and a primary second resolved beam of light havingsubstantially a second selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of the electric field vectors; [c] means for separating eachof the primary resolved beams of light into two or more separate beamsof light, each of the separate beams of light having a selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors; [d] means for altering the selected predetermined orientationof the chosen component of the electric field vectors of a plurality ofportions of each of the separate beams of light by passing the pluralityof portions of each of the separate beams of light through a respectiveone of a plurality of altering means whereby the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the separate beams of light is alteredin response to a stimulus means by applying a signal means to thestimulus means in a predetermined manner as the plurality of portions ofeach of the separate beams of light passes through the respective one ofthe plurality of means for altering the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors; [e][i] means for combining the altered separate beams of light of theprimary first resolved beam of light into a first single collinear beamof light without substantially changing the altered selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors of the plurality of portions of each of the separate beams oflight, and [ii] means for combining the altered separate beams of lightof the primary second resolved beam of light into a second singlecollinear beam of light without substantially changing the alteredselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors of the plurality of portions of each of theseparate beams of light; and [f] [i] means for resolving from the firstsingle collinear beam of light a first resolved beam of light havingsubstantially a first selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electric field vectors and a second resolved beam of lighthaving substantially a second selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electric field vectors, and [ii] means for resolvingfrom the second single collinear beam of light a first resolved beam oflight having substantially a first selected predetermined orientation ofa chosen component of electric field vectors and a second resolved beamof light having substantially a second selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electric field vectors.
 276. Asystem as described in claim 275 in which the means for providing aprimary beam of light includes means for providing a substantiallycollimated beam of light.
 277. A system as described in claim 275 inwhich the means for providing a primary beam of light includes means forproviding the initial beam of light having a rectangular cross sectionalarea.
 278. A system as described in claim 275 in which the means forproviding a primary beam of light includes means for providing aninitial beam of light having substantially the same selectedpredetermined orientation for the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors substantially across the beam.
 279. A system as described inclaim 275 in which the means for resolving the primary beam of lightinto primary first and second resolved beams of light includes means forresolving the primary beam of light into primary first and secondresolved beams of light with the resolved beams of light having thesubstantially same selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors substantially across each of theresolved beams of light as that of the other resolved beams of light.280. A system as described in claim 275 in which the means for resolvingthe primary beam of light into primary first and second resolved beamsof light includes means for resolving the primary beam of light intoprimary first and second resolved beams of light with the first selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors having the same selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors as that of the second selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors.
 281. A system as described in claim 275 further comprisingmeans for passing at least one of the resolved beams of light from step[f] to a projection means.
 282. A system as described in claim 275further comprising means for passing one of the resolved beams of lightfrom step [f] [i] to a first projection means and passing one of theresolved beams of light from step [f] [ii] to a second projection means.283. A system as described in claim 275 further comprising the means foradjusting the electromagnetic spectrum of at least one of the separatebeams of light.
 284. A system as described in claim 283 wherein themeans for adjusting the electromagnetic spectrum of at least one of theseparate beams of light includes means for adjusting a predeterminedrange of wavelengths of at least one of the separate beams of light.285. A system as described in claim 283 wherein the means for adjustingthe electromagnetic spectrum of at least one of the separate beams oflight includes the means for adjusting a magnitude of at least one ofthe separate beams of light.
 286. A system as described in claim 275wherein the separating means includes means for separating the beams inwhich each of the separate beams of light has an light spectrumdifferent from the light spectrum of each of the other separate beams oflight.
 287. A system as described in claim 286 wherein the separatingmeans includes means for separating the beams in which each of theseparate beams of light has a predetermined range of wavelengthsdifferent from a predetermined range of wavelengths of each of the otherseparate beams of light.
 288. A system as described in claim 286 furthercomprising the means for adjusting the magnitude of at least one of theseparate beams of light.
 289. A method of producing a collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy having two constituent parts, comprising: [a]providing a primary beam of electromagnetic energy having apredetermined range of wavelengths, randomly changing orientations of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors, and asubstantially uniform flux intensity substantially across the initialbeam of electromagnetic energy; [b] resolving the primary beam ofelectromagnetic energy into a primary first resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy having substantially a first selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors and a primary second resolved beam of electromagneticenergy having substantially a second selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors; [c]altering the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electromagnetic wave field vectors of a plurality of portions ofeach of the primary resolved beams of electromagnetic energy by passingthe plurality of portions of each of the primary resolved beams ofelectromagnetic energy through a respective one of a plurality ofaltering means whereby the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the primary resolved beams ofelectromagnetic energy is altered in response to a stimulus means byapplying a signal means to the stimulus means in a predetermined manneras the plurality of portions of each of the primary resolved beams ofelectromagnetic energy passes through the respective one of theplurality of means for altering the selected predetermined orientationof the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors; [d][i] resolving from the first altered primary first resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy a first resolved beam of electromagnetic energyhaving substantially a first selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors and a secondresolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially a secondselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors, and [ii] resolving from the secondaltered primary first resolved beam of electromagnetic energy a firstresolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially a firstselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors and a second resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy having substantially a second selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors, and [e] merging one of the resolved beams ofelectromagnetic energy from the altered primary first resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy with one of the resolved beams of electromagneticenergy from the second altered primary resolved beam of electromagneticenergy into a first single collinear beam of electromagnetic energy.290. A method as described in claim 289 wherein step [b] includesresolving the primary beam into primary first and second resolved beamsin which the first selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors has the sameselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors of the second selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors.
 291. A method as described in claim 289 wherein step [b]includes resolving the primary beam into primary first and secondresolved beams in which the first selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors has aselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors different from the second selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors.
 292. A method as described in claim 289 wherein step[e] includes merging said resolved beams in which the plurality ofportions of one of the merged resolved beams has a different selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors from the plurality of portions of the other mergedresolved beam.
 293. A method as described in claim 289 wherein step [e]includes merging said resolved beams in which each merged beam has itsplurality of portions parallel and noncoincident to the plurality ofportions of the other merged beam.
 294. A method as described in claim289 wherein step [e] includes merging said resolved beams in which eachmerged beam has its plurality of portions parallel and partiallycoincident to the plurality of portions of the other merged beam.
 295. Amethod as described in claim 289 wherein step [e] includes merging saidresolved beams in which each merged beam has its plurality of portionsparallel and simultaneous to the plurality of portions of the othermerged beam.
 296. A method as described in claim 289 wherein step [e]includes merging said resolved beams in which each merged beam has itsplurality of portions parallel, noncoincident and simultaneous to theplurality of portions of the other merged beam.
 297. A method asdescribed in claim 289 wherein step [e] includes merging said resolvedbeams in which each merged beam has its plurality of portions parallel,partially coincident and simultaneous to the plurality of portions ofthe other merged beam.
 298. A method as described in claim 289 whereinstep [e] includes merging said resolved beams in which the plurality ofportions of one of the merged beams has the substantially same selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors as the plurality of portions of the other merged beam.299. A method as described in claim 289 wherein step [e] includesmerging said resolved beams in which the plurality of portions of one ofthe merged beams has the substantially same selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectorsas the plurality of portions of the other merged beam and each mergedbeam has its plurality of portions parallel and noncoincident to theplurality of portions of the other merged beam.
 300. A method asdescribed in claim 289 wherein step [e] includes merging said resolvedbeams in which the plurality of portions of one of the merged beams hasthe substantially same selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electromagnetic wave field vectors as the plurality ofportions of the other merged beam and each merged beam has its pluralityof portions parallel and partially coincident to the plurality ofportions of the other merged beam.
 301. A method as described in claim289 wherein step [e] includes merging said resolved beams in which theplurality of portions of one of the merged beams has the substantiallysame selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors as that of the plurality of portionsof the other merged beam and each merged beam having its plurality ofportions parallel and simultaneous to the plurality of portions of theother merged beam.
 302. A method as described in claim 289 furthercomprising the step of passing the first single collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy to a projection means.
 303. A method of producinga collinear beam of light having two constituent parts, comprising: [a]providing a primary beam of light having a predetermined range ofwavelengths randomly changing orientations of a chosen component ofelectric field vectors, and a substantially uniform flux intensitysubstantially across the initial beam of light; [b] resolving theprimary beam of light into a primary first resolved beam of light havingsubstantially a first selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of the electric field vectors and a primary second resolvedbeam of light having substantially a second selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of the electric field vectors; [c]altering the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electric field vectors of a plurality of portions of each of theprimary resolved beams of light by passing the plurality of portions ofeach of the primary resolved beams of light through a respective one ofa plurality of altering means whereby the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the primary resolved beams of light isaltered in response to a stimulus means by applying a signal means tothe stimulus means in a predetermined manner as the plurality ofportions of each of the primary resolved beams of light passes throughthe respective one of the plurality of means for altering the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors; [d] [i] resolving from the first altered primary first resolvedbeam of light a first resolved beam of light having substantially afirst selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectric field vectors and a second resolved beam of light havingsubstantially a second selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electric field vectors, and [ii] resolving from the secondaltered primary first resolved beam of light a first resolved beam oflight having substantially a first selected predetermined orientation ofa chosen component of electric field vectors and a second resolved beamof light having substantially a second selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electric field vectors; and [e]merging one of the resolved beams of light from the altered primaryfirst resolved beam of light with one of the resolved beams of lightfrom the second altered primary resolved beam of light into a firstsingle collinear beam of light.
 304. A method as described in claim 303wherein step [b] includes resolving the primary beam into primary firstand second resolved beams in which the first selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors hasthe same selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electric field vectors of the second selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors. 305.A method as described in claim 303 wherein step [b] includes resolvingthe primary beam into primary first and second resolved beams in whichthe first selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electric field vectors has a selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electric field vectors different from thesecond selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors.
 306. A method as described in claim 303 whereinstep [e] includes merging said resolved beams in which the plurality ofportions of one of the merged resolved beams has a different selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors from the plurality of portions of the other merged resolvedbeam.
 307. A method as described in claim 303 wherein step [e] includesmerging said resolved beams in which each merged beam has its pluralityof portions parallel and noncoincident to the plurality of portions ofthe other merged beam.
 308. A method as described in claim 303 whereinstep [e] includes merging said resolved beams in which each merged beamhas its plurality of portions parallel and partially coincident to theplurality of portions of the other merged beam.
 309. A method asdescribed in claim 303 wherein step [e] includes merging said resolvedbeams in which each merged beam has its plurality of portions paralleland simultaneous to the plurality of portions of the other merged beam.310. A method as described in claim 303 wherein step [e] includesmerging said resolved beams in which each merged beam has its pluralityof portions parallel, noncoincident and simultaneous to the plurality ofportions of the other merged beam.
 311. A method as described in claim303 wherein step [e] includes merging said resolved beams in which eachmerged beam has its plurality of portions parallel, partially coincidentand simultaneous to the plurality of portions of the other merged beam.312. A method as described in claim 303 wherein step [e] includesmerging said resolved beams in which the plurality of portions of one ofthe merged beams has the substantially same selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electric field vectors as theplurality of portions of the other merged beam.
 313. A method asdescribed in claim 303 wherein step [e] includes merging said resolvedbeams in which the plurality of portions of one of the merged beams hasthe substantially same selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electric field vectors as the plurality of portions of theother merged beam and each merged beam has its plurality of portionsparallel and noncoincident to the plurality of portions of the othermerged beam.
 314. A method as described in claim 303 wherein step [e]includes merging said resolved beams in which the plurality of portionsof one of the merged beams has the substantially same selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors as the plurality of portions of the other merged beam and eachmerged beam has its plurality of portions parallel and partiallycoincident to the plurality of portions of the other merged beam.
 315. Amethod as described in claim 303 wherein step [e] includes merging saidresolved beams in which the plurality of portions of one of the mergedbeams has the substantially same selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electric field vectors as that of the plurality ofportions of the other merged beam and each merged beam having itsplurality of portions parallel and simultaneous to the plurality ofportions of the other merged beam.
 316. A method as described in claim303 further comprising the step of passing the first single collinearbeam of electromagnetic energy to a projection means.
 317. A method asdescribed in claim 289 wherein step [a] includes providing a primarybeam of ultraviolet.
 318. A system of producing a collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy having two constituent parts, comprising: [a]means for providing a primary beam of electromagnetic energy having apredetermined range of wavelengths, randomly changing orientations of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors, and asubstantially uniform flux intensity substantially across the initialbeam of electromagnetic energy; [b] means for resolving the primary beamof electromagnetic energy into a primary first resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy having substantially a first selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors and a primary second resolved beam of electromagneticenergy having substantially a second selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors; [c]means for altering the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of a plurality ofportions of each of the primary resolved beams of electromagnetic energyby passing the plurality of portions of each of the primary resolvedbeams of electromagnetic energy through a respective one of a pluralityof altering means whereby the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the primary resolved beams ofelectromagnetic energy is altered in response to a stimulus means byapplying a signal means to the stimulus means in a predetermined manneras the plurality of portions of each of the primary resolved beams ofelectromagnetic energy passes through the respective one of theplurality of means for altering the selected predetermined orientationof the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors; [d][i] means for resolving from the first altered primary first resolvedbeam of electromagnetic energy a first resolved beam of electromagneticenergy having substantially a first selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors and a secondresolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially a secondselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors, and [ii] means for resolving fromthe second altered primary first resolved beam of electromagnetic energya first resolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially afirst selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors and a second resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy having substantially a second selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors; and [e] means for merging one of the resolved beams ofelectromagnetic energy from the altered primary first resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy with one of the resolved beams of electromagneticenergy from the second altered primary resolved beam of electromagneticenergy into a first single collinear beam of electromagnetic energy.319. A system as described in claim 318 wherein the means for resolvingthe primary beam into first and second resolved beams includes means forresolving the primary beam into first and second resolved beams in whichthe first selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electromagnetic wave field vectors has the same selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors as the second selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors.
 320. Asystem as described in claim 318 wherein the means for resolving theprimary beam into first and second resolved beams includes means forresolving the primary beam into first and second resolved beams in whichthe first selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electromagnetic wave field vectors has the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors different from the second selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors.
 321. Asystem as described in claim 318 wherein the means for merging theresolved beams includes means for merging the resolved beams in whichthe plurality of portions of one of the merged resolved beams has adifferent selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors from the plurality of portions of theother merged resolved beam.
 322. A system as described in claim 318wherein the means for merging the resolved beams includes means formerging the resolved beams in which each merged beam has its pluralityof portions parallel and noncoincident to the plurality of portions ofthe other merged beam.
 323. A system as described in claim 318 whereinthe means for merging the resolved beams includes means for merging theresolved beams in which each merged beam has its plurality of portionsparallel and partially coincident to the plurality of portions of theother merged beam.
 324. A system as described in claim 318 wherein themeans for merging the resolved beams includes means for merging theresolved beams in which each merged beam has its plurality of portionsparallel and simultaneous to the plurality of portions of the othermerged beam.
 325. A system as described in claim 318 wherein the meansfor merging the resolved beams includes means for merging the resolvedbeams in which each merged beam has its plurality of portions parallel,noncoincident and simultaneous to the plurality of portions of the othermerged beam.
 326. A system as described in claim 318 wherein the meansfor merging the resolved beams includes means for merging the resolvedbeams in which each merged beam has its plurality of portions parallel,partially coincident and simultaneous to the plurality of portions ofthe other merged beam.
 327. A system as described in claim 318 whereinthe means for merging the resolved beams includes means for merging theresolved beams in which the plurality of portions of one of the mergedbeams has the substantially same selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors as the pluralityof portions of the other merged beam.
 328. A system as described inclaim 318 wherein the means for merging the resolved beams includesmeans for merging the resolved beams in which the plurality of portionsof one of the merged beams has the substantially same selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors of the plurality of portions of the other merged beam andeach merged beam has its plurality of portions parallel andnoncoincident to the plurality of portions of the other merged beam.329. A system as described in claim 318 wherein the means for mergingthe resolved beams includes means for merging the resolved beams inwhich the plurality of portions of one of the merged beams has thesubstantially same selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electromagnetic wave field vectors of the plurality ofportions of the other merged beam and each merged beam has its pluralityof portions parallel and partially coincident to the plurality ofportions of the other merged beam.
 330. A system as described in claim318 wherein the means for merging the resolved beams includes means formerging the resolved beams in which the plurality of portions of one ofthe merged beams has the substantially same selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectorsof the plurality of portions of the other merged beam and each mergedbeam having its plurality of portions parallel and simultaneous to theplurality of portions of the other merged beam.
 331. A system asdescribed in claim 318 further comprising means for passing the firstsingle collinear beam of electromagnetic energy to a projection means.332. A system of producing a collinear beam of light having twoconstituent parts, comprising: [a] means for providing a primary beam oflight having a predetermined range of wavelengths, randomly changingorientations of a chosen component of electric field vectors, and asubstantially uniform flux intensity substantially across the initialbeam of light; [b] means for resolving the primary beam of light into aprimary first resolved beam of light having substantially a firstselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electricfield vectors and a primary second resolved beam of light havingsubstantially a second selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of the electric field vectors; [c] means for altering theselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors of a plurality of portions of each of the primaryresolved beams of light by passing the plurality of portions of each ofthe primary resolved beams of light through a respective one of aplurality of altering means whereby the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the primary resolved beams of light isaltered in response to a stimulus means by applying a signal means tothe stimulus means in a predetermined manner as the plurality ofportions of each of the primary resolved beams of light passes throughthe respective one of the plurality of means for altering the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors; [d] [i] means for resolving from the first altered primaryfirst resolved beam of light a first resolved beam of light havingsubstantially a first selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electric field vectors and a second resolved beam of lighthaving substantially a second selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electric field vectors, and [ii] means for resolvingfrom the second altered primary first resolved beam of light a firstresolved beam of light having substantially a first selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors and a second resolved beam of light having substantially asecond selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectric field vectors; and [e] means for merging one of the resolvedbeams of light from the altered primary first resolved beam of lightwith one of the resolved beams of light from the second altered primaryresolved beam of light into a first single collinear beam of light. 333.A system as described in claim 332 wherein the means for resolving theprimary beam into first and second resolved beams includes means forresolving the primary beam into first and second resolved beams in whichthe first selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electric field vectors has the same selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors as thesecond selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors.
 334. A system as described in claim 332 whereinthe means for resolving the primary beam into first and second resolvedbeams includes means for resolving the primary beam into first andsecond resolved beams in which the first selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors hasthe selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors different from the second selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors. 335.A system as described in claim 332 wherein the means for merging theresolved beams includes means for merging the resolved beams in whichthe plurality of portions of one of the merged resolved beams has adifferent selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectric field vectors from the plurality of portions of the othermerged resolved beam.
 336. A system as described in claim 332 whereinthe means for merging the resolved beams includes means for merging theresolved beams in which each merged beam has its plurality of portionsparallel and noncoincident to the plurality of portions of the othermerged beam.
 337. A system as described in claim 332 wherein the meansfor merging the resolved beams includes means for merging the resolvedbeams in which each merged beam has its plurality of portions paralleland partially coincident to the plurality of portions of the othermerged beam.
 338. A system as described in claim 332 wherein the meansfor merging the resolved beams includes means for merging the resolvedbeams in which each merged beam has its plurality of portions paralleland simultaneous to the plurality of portions of the other merged beam.339. A system as described in claim 332 wherein the means for mergingthe resolved beams includes means for merging the resolved beams inwhich each merged beam has its plurality of portions parallel,noncoincident and simultaneous to the plurality of portions of the othermerged beam.
 340. A system as described in claim 332 wherein the meansfor merging the resolved beams includes means for merging the resolvedbeams in which each merged beam has its plurality of portions parallel,partially coincident and simultaneous to the plurality of portions ofthe other merged beam.
 341. A system as described in claim 332 whereinthe means for merging the resolved beams includes means for merging theresolved beams in which the plurality of portions of one of the mergedbeams has the substantially same selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electric field vectors as the plurality of portionsof the other merged beam.
 342. A system as described in claim 332wherein the means for merging the resolved beams includes means formerging the resolved beams in which the plurality of portions of one ofthe merged beams has the substantially same selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electric field vectors of theplurality of portions of the other merged beam and each merged beam hasits plurality of portions parallel and noncoincident to the plurality ofportions of the other merged beam.
 343. A system as described in claim332 wherein the means for merging the resolved beams includes means formerging the resolved beams in which the plurality of portions of one ofthe merged beams has the substantially same selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electric field vectors of theplurality of portions of the other merged beam and each merged beam hasits plurality of portions parallel and partially coincident to theplurality of portions of the other merged beam.
 344. A system asdescribed in claim 332 wherein the means for merging the resolved beamsincludes means for merging the resolved beams in which the plurality ofportions of one of the merged beams has the substantially same selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors of the plurality of portions of the other merged beam and eachmerged beam having its plurality of portions parallel and simultaneousto the plurality of portions of the other merged beam.
 345. A system asdescribed in claim 332 further comprising means for passing the firstsingle collinear beam of light to a projection means.
 346. A system asdescribed in claim 318 wherein the means for providing a primary beamincludes providing a primary beam of ultraviolet.
 347. A method ofproducing one or more collinear beams of electromagnetic energy,comprising: [a] producing four or more separate beams of electromagneticenergy, each of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy having thesame selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors substantially across each beam, apredetermined range of wavelengths and a substantially uniform fluxintensity substantially across each beam of electromagnetic energy; [b]altering the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electromagnetic wave field vectors of a plurality of portions ofeach of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy by passing theplurality of portions of each of the separate beams of electromagneticenergy through a respective one of a plurality of altering means wherebythe selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors of the plurality of portions of eachof the separate beams of electromagnetic energy is altered in responseto a stimulus means by applying a signal means to the stimulus means ina predetermined manner as the plurality of portions of each of theseparate beams of electromagnetic energy passes through the respectiveone of the plurality of means for altering the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors; [c] [i] combining at least one of the altered separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy with at least one of the other altered separatebeams of electromagnetic energy into a first single collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy without substantially changing the alteredselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors of the plurality of portions of eachof the combined separate beams of electromagnetic energy, and [ii]combining at least one of the altered separate beams of electromagneticenergy with at least one of the other altered separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy into a second single collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy without substantially changing the alteredselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors of the plurality of portions of eachof the combined separate beams of electromagnetic energy; [d] [i]resolving from the first single collinear beam of electromagnetic energya first resolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially afirst selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors and a second resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy having substantially a second selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors, and [ii] resolving from the second single collinear beamof electromagnetic energy a first resolved beam of electromagneticenergy having substantially a first selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors and a secondresolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially a secondselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors; and [e] merging one of the resolvedbeams of electromagnetic energy from the first single collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy with one of the other resolved beams ofelectromagnetic energy from the second single collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy into a third single collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy.
 348. A method as described in claim 347 whereinstep [a] includes producing each separate beam of electromagnetic energyfurther having a rectangular cross sectional area.
 349. A method asdescribed in claim 347 further comprising the step of passing the thirdsingle collinear beam of electromagnetic energy to a projection means.350. A method as described in claim 347 further comprising the step ofadjusting the electromagnetic spectrum of at least one of the separatebeams of electromagnetic energy.
 351. A method as described in claim 350wherein the step of adjusting the electromagnetic spectrum of at leastone of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy includes adjustingthe predetermined range of wavelengths of at least one of the separatebeams of electromagnetic energy.
 352. A method as described in claim 350wherein the step of adjusting the electromagnetic spectrum of at leastone of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy includes adjustingthe magnitude of at least one of the separate beams of electromagneticenergy.
 353. A method of producing one or more collinear beams of light,comprising: [a] producing four or more separate beams of light, each ofthe separate beams of light having the same selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electric field vectorssubstantially across each beam, a predetermined range of wavelengths anda substantially uniform flux intensity substantially across each beam oflight; [b] altering the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors of a plurality of portions ofeach of the separate beams of light by passing the plurality of portionsof each of the separate beams of light through a respective one of aplurality of altering means whereby the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the separate beams of light is alteredin response to a stimulus means by applying a signal means to thestimulus means in a predetermined manner as the plurality of portions ofeach of the separate beams of light passes through the respective one ofthe plurality of means for altering the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors; [c][i] combining at least one of the altered separate beams of light withat least one of the other altered separate beams of light into a firstsingle collinear beam of light without substantially changing thealtered selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electric field vectors of the plurality of portions of each of thecombined separate beams of light, and [ii] combining at least one of thealtered separate beams of light with at least one of the other alteredseparate beams of light into a second single collinear beam of lightwithout substantially changing the altered selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the combined separate beams of light;[d] [i] resolving from the first single collinear beam of light a firstresolved beam of light having substantially a first selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors and a second resolved beam of light having substantially asecond selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectric field vectors, and [ii] resolving from the second singlecollinear beam of light a first resolved beam of light havingsubstantially a first selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electric field vectors and a second resolved beam of lighthaving substantially a second selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electric field vectors; and [e] merging one of theresolved beams of light from the first single collinear beam of lightwith one of the other resolved beams of light from the second singlecollinear beam of light into a third single collinear beam of light.354. A method as described in claim 353 wherein step [a] includesproducing each separate beam of light further having a rectangular crosssectional area.
 355. A method as described in claim 353 furthercomprising the step of passing the third single collinear beam of lightto a projection means.
 356. A method as described in claim 353 furthercomprising the step of adjusting the light spectrum of at least one ofthe separate beams of light.
 357. A method as described in claim 356wherein the step of adjusting the light spectrum of at least one of theseparate beams of light includes adjusting the predetermined range ofwavelengths of at least one of the separate beams of light.
 358. Amethod as described in claim 356 wherein the step of adjusting the lightspectrum of at least one of the separate beams of light includesadjusting the magnitude of at least one of the separate beams of light.359. A system of producing one or more collinear beams ofelectromagnetic energy, comprising: [a] means for producing four or moreseparate beams of electromagnetic energy, each of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy having the same selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectorssubstantially across each beam, a predetermined range of wavelengths anda substantially uniform flux intensity substantially across each beam ofelectromagnetic energy; [b] means for altering the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors of a plurality of portions of each of the separatebeams of electromagnetic energy by passing the plurality of portions ofeach of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy through arespective one of a plurality of altering means whereby the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors of the plurality of portions of each of the separatebeams of electromagnetic energy is altered in response to a stimulusmeans by applying a signal means to the stimulus means in apredetermined manner as the plurality of portions of each of theseparate beams of electromagnetic energy passes through the respectiveone of the plurality of means for altering the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors; [c] [i] means for combining at least one of the alteredseparate beams of electromagnetic energy with at least one of the otheraltered separate beams of electromagnetic energy into a first singlecollinear beam of electromagnetic energy without substantially changingthe altered selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electromagnetic wave field vectors of the plurality of portionsof each of the combined separate beams of electromagnetic energy, and[ii] means for combining at least one of the altered separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy with at least one of the other altered separatebeams of electromagnetic energy into a second single collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy without substantially changing the alteredselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors of the plurality of portions of eachof the combined separate beams of electromagnetic energy; [d] [i] meansfor resolving from the first single collinear beam of electromagneticenergy a first resolved beam of electromagnetic energy havingsubstantially a first selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electromagnetic wave field vectors and a second resolvedbeam of electromagnetic energy having substantially a second selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors, and [ii] means for resolving from the second singlecollinear beam of electromagnetic energy a first resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy having substantially a first selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors and a second resolved beam of electromagnetic energyhaving substantially a second selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors; and [e] meansfor merging one of the resolved beams of electromagnetic energy from thefirst single collinear beam of electromagnetic energy with one of theother resolved beams of electromagnetic energy from the second singlecollinear beam of electromagnetic energy into a third single collinearbeam of electromagnetic energy.
 360. A system as described in claim 359in which the means for producing four or more separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy includes means for producing each separate beamof electromagnetic energy having a rectangular cross sectional area.361. A system as described in claim 359 further comprising means forpassing the third single collinear beam of electromagnetic energy to aprojection means.
 362. A system as described in claim 359 furthercomprising means for adjusting the electromagnetic spectrum of at leastone of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy.
 363. A system asdescribed in claim 359 in which the means for adjusting theelectromagnetic spectrum of at least one of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy includes means for adjusting the predeterminedrange of wavelengths of at least one of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy.
 364. A system as described in claim 359 in whichthe means for adjusting the electromagnetic spectrum of at least one ofthe separate beams of electromagnetic energy includes means foradjusting the magnitude of at least one of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy.
 365. A system of producing one or more collinearbeams of light, comprising: [a] means for producing four or moreseparate beams of light, each of the separate beams of light having thesame selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectric field vectors substantially across each beam, a predeterminedrange of wavelengths and a substantially uniform flux intensitysubstantially across the initial beam of light; [b] means for alteringthe selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors of a plurality of portions of each of theseparate beams of light by passing the plurality of portions of each ofthe separate beams of light through a respective one of a plurality ofmeans for altering means whereby the selected predetermined orientationof the chosen component of the electric field vectors of the pluralityof portions of each of the separate beams of light is altered inresponse to a stimulus means by applying a signal means to the stimulusmeans in a predetermined manner as the plurality of portions of each ofthe separate beams of light passes through the respective one of theplurality of means for altering the selected predetermined orientationof the chosen component of the electric field vectors; [c] [i] means forcombining at least one of the altered separate beams of light with atleast one of the other altered separate beams of light into a firstsingle collinear beam of light without substantially changing thealtered selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electric field vectors of the plurality of portions of each of thecombined separate beams of light, and [ii] means for combining at leastone of the altered separate beams of light with at least one of theother altered separate beams of light into a second single collinearbeam of light without substantially changing the altered selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors of the plurality of portions of each of the combined separatebeams of light; [d] [i] means for resolving from the first singlecollinear beam of light a first resolved beam of light havingsubstantially a first selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electric field vectors and a second resolved beam of lighthaving substantially a second selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electric field vectors, and [ii] means for resolvingfrom the second single collinear beam of light a first resolved beam oflight having substantially a first selected predetermined orientation ofa chosen component of electric field vectors and a second resolved beamof light having substantially a second selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electric field vectors; and [e]means for merging one of the resolved beams of light from the firstsingle collinear beam of light with one of the other resolved beams oflight from the second single collinear beam of light into a third singlecollinear beam of light.
 366. A system as described in claim 365 inwhich the means for producing four or more separate beams of lightincludes means for producing each separate beam of light having arectangular cross sectional area.
 367. A system as described in claim365 further comprising means for passing the third single collinear beamof light to a projection means.
 368. A system as described in claim 365further comprising means for adjusting the light spectrum of at leastone of the separate beams of light.
 369. A system as described in claim368 in which the means for adjusting the light spectrum of at least oneof the separate beams of light includes means for adjusting thepredetermined range of wavelengths of at least one of the separate beamsof light.
 370. A system as described in claim 368 in which the means foradjusting the light spectrum of at least one of the separate beams oflight includes means for adjusting a magnitude of at least one of theseparate beams of light.
 371. A method of producing a modulated beam ofelectromagnetic energy comprising: [a] producing an initial beam ofelectromagnetic energy having a predetermined range of wavelengths andhaving a substantially uniform flux intensity substantially across theinitial beam of electromagnetic energy; [b] separating the initial beamof electromagnetic energy into two or more separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy, each of the separate beams of electromagneticenergy having a selected predetermined orientation of a chosen componentof electromagnetic wave field vectors; [c] altering the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors of a plurality of portions of each of the separatebeams of electromagnetic energy by passing the plurality of portions ofeach of the separate beams of electromagnetic energy through arespective one of a plurality of altering means whereby the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors of the plurality of portions of each of the separatebeams of electromagnetic energy is altered in response to a stimulusmeans by applying a signal means to the stimulus means in apredetermined manner as the plurality of portions of each of thesubstantially separate beams of electromagnetic energy passes throughthe respective one of the plurality of means for altering the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors; [d] combining the altered separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy into a single collinear beam of electromagneticenergy without substantially changing the altered selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors of the plurality of portions of each of the separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy; [e] resolving from the single collinear beam ofelectromagnetic energy a first resolved beam of electromagnetic energyhaving substantially a first selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors and a secondresolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially a secondselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors, whereby the first and secondselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors are different from one another; and[f] altering the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of a plurality ofportions of the resolved beam of electromagnetic energy by passing theplurality of portions of the resolved beam of electromagnetic energythrough a altering means whereby the selected predetermined orientationof the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of theplurality of portions of the resolved beam of electromagnetic energy isaltered in response to a stimulus means by applying a signal means tothe stimulus means in a predetermined manner as the plurality ofportions of the resolved beam of electromagnetic energy passes throughthe plurality of means for altering the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors.
 372. A method of producing a modulated beam of lightcomprising: [a] producing an initial beam of light having apredetermined range of wavelengths and having a substantially uniformflux intensity substantially across the initial beam of light; [b]separating the initial beam of light into two or more separate beams oflight, each of the separate beams of light having a selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors; [c] altering the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electric field vectors of a plurality ofportions of each of the separate beams of light by passing the pluralityof portions of each of the separate beams of light through a respectiveone of a plurality of altering means whereby the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of theplurality of portions of each of the separate beams of light is alteredin response to a stimulus means by applying a signal means to thestimulus means in a predetermined manner as the plurality of portions ofeach of the substantially separate beams of light passes through therespective one of the plurality of means for altering the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors; [d] combining the altered separate beams of light into a singlecollinear beam of light without substantially changing the alteredselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors of the plurality of portions of each of theseparate beams of light; [e] resolving from the single collinear beam oflight a first resolved beam of light having substantially a firstselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of electricfield vectors and a second resolved beam of light having substantially asecond selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectric field vectors, whereby the first and second selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors are different from one another; and [f] altering the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors of a plurality of portions of the resolved beam of light bypassing the plurality of portions of the resolved beam of light througha altering means whereby the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electric field vectors of the plurality ofportions of the resolved beam of light is altered in response to astimulus means by applying a signal means to the stimulus means in apredetermined manner as the plurality of portions of the resolved beamof light passes through the plurality of means for altering the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors.
 373. A method of producing a substantially collimated beam ofelectromagnetic energy having substantially the same selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors and a substantially uniform flux intensity substantiallyacross the beam of electromagnetic energy, comprising: [a] providing asubstantially collimated beam of electromagnetic energy having apredetermined range of wavelengths; [b] resolving from the substantiallycollimated beam of electromagnetic energy a substantially collimatedfirst resolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially afirst selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors and a substantially collimated secondresolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially a secondselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors, whereby the first and secondselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors are different from one another; and[c] forming from the substantially collimated first resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy and the substantially collimated second resolvedbeam of electromagnetic energy a substantially collimated single beam ofelectromagnetic energy having substantially the same selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors substantially across the substantially collimated singlebeam of electromagnetic energy and a substantially uniform fluxintensity substantially across the substantially collimated single beamof electromagnetic energy.
 374. A method as described in claim 373wherein step [c] includes forming the single beam of electromagneticenergy further having a rectangular cross sectional area.
 375. A methodas described in claim 373 further comprising between steps [b] and [c]the step of producing from the substantially collimated first and secondresolved beam of electromagnetic energy a substantially collimated firstand second resolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantiallythe same selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electromagnetic wave field vectors.
 376. A method as described inclaim 373 wherein step [b] includes resolving from the substantiallycollimated beam of electromagnetic energy a substantially collimatedfirst resolved beam of electromagnetic energy and substantiallycollimated second resolved beam of electromagnetic energy further havingsubstantially uniform flux intensity substantially across the beam ofelectromagnetic energy, and step [c] further includes forming thesubstantially collimated single beam of electromagnetic energy furtherhaving substantially the same uniform flux intensity substantiallyacross the beam of electromagnetic energy as that of each of theresolved beams of electromagnetic energy.
 377. A method as described inclaim 373 further comprising between steps [b] and [c] the step ofproducing from the substantially collimated first and second resolvedbeam of electromagnetic energy a substantially collimated first andsecond resolved beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially thesame selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors, whereby the substantially collimatedfirst and second resolved beam of electromagnetic energy are paralleland noncollinear.
 378. A method as described in claim 373 furthercomprising the step of passing one of the substantially collimatedresolved beams of electromagnetic energy through a means for changingthe selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors.
 379. A method as described in claim378 wherein the step of passing one of the substantially collimatedresolved beams of electromagnetic energy through a means for changingthe selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors includes passing one of thesubstantially collimated resolved beams of electromagnetic energythrough a liquid crystal device for changing the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors.
 380. A method as described in claim 373 further comprising thestep of passing one of the substantially collimated resolved beams ofelectromagnetic energy through a means for changing the selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors and changing the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of one of thesubstantially collimated resolved beam of electromagnetic energy tomatch substantially the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of the othersubstantially collimated resolved beam of electromagnetic energy.
 381. Amethod as described in claim 373 wherein step [c] further comprises thestep of reflecting one of the substantially collimated resolved beams ofelectromagnetic energy from one or more reflecting means, each of thereflecting means having means for changing the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors.
 382. A method as described in claim 381 wherein the step ofreflecting one of the substantially collimated resolved beams ofelectromagnetic energy from one or more reflecting means, each of thereflecting means having means for changing the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors includes reflecting one of the substantially collimated resolvedbeams of electromagnetic energy from one or more planar reflectingsurface having a dielectric coating, each planar reflecting surfacehaving a dielectric coating including means for changing the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors.
 383. A method as described in claim 381 wherein thestep of reflecting one of the substantially collimated resolved beams ofelectromagnetic energy from one or more reflecting means, each of thereflecting means having means for changing the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors includes reflecting one of the substantially collimated resolvedbeams of electromagnetic energy from one or more mirrors having a thinfilm dielectric material, each mirrors having a thin film dielectricmaterial including means for changing the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors.
 384. A method as described in claim 373 wherein step [a]includes providing a substantially collimated beam of electromagneticenergy further having randomly changing orientations of a chosencomponent of electromagnetic wave field vectors.
 385. A method asdescribed in claim 373 further comprising the step of removing from atleast one of the beams of electromagnetic energy at least apredetermined portion of a predetermined range of wavelengths.
 386. Amethod as described in claim 385 further including directing the removedportions to an absorption means.
 387. A method of producing asubstantially collimated beam of electromagnetic energy havingsubstantially the same selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electromagnetic wave field vectors and a substantiallyuniform flux intensity substantially across the beam of electromagneticenergy, comprising: [a] providing a substantially collimated beam ofelectromagnetic energy having a predetermined range of wavelengths andsubstantially the same selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electromagnetic wave field vectors; [b] resolving from thesubstantially collimated beam of electromagnetic energy a substantiallycollimated first resolved beam of electromagnetic energy havingsubstantially a first selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors and a substantiallycollimated second resolved beam of electromagnetic energy havingsubstantially a second selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors, whereby the firstand second selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electromagnetic wave field vectors are substantially the same; and[c] forming from the substantially collimated first resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy and the substantially collimated second resolvedbeam of electromagnetic energy a substantially collimated single beam ofelectromagnetic energy having substantially the same selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors substantially across the substantially collimated singlebeam of electromagnetic energy and a substantially uniform fluxintensity substantially across the substantially collimated single beamof electromagnetic energy.
 388. A method of producing a substantiallycollimated beam of light having substantially the same selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors and a substantially uniform flux intensity substantially acrossthe beam of light, comprising: [a] providing a substantially collimatedbeam of light having a predetermined range of wavelengths; [b] resolvingfrom the substantially collimated beam of light a substantiallycollimated first resolved beam of light having substantially a firstselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electricfield vectors and a substantially collimated second resolved beam oflight having substantially a second selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of the electric field vectors, whereby the firstand second selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electric field vectors are different from one another; and [c]forming from the substantially collimated first resolved beam of lightand the substantially collimated second resolved beam of light asubstantially collimated single beam of light having substantially thesame selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectric field vectors substantially across the substantially collimatedsingle beam of light and a substantially uniform flux intensitysubstantially across the substantially collimated single beam of light.389. A method as described in claim 388 wherein step [c] includesforming the single beam of light further having a rectangular crosssectional area.
 390. A method as described in claim 388 furthercomprising between steps [b] and [c] the step of producing from thesubstantially collimated first and second resolved beam of light asubstantially collimated first and second resolved beam of light havingsubstantially the same selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors.
 391. A method as described inclaim 388 wherein step [b] includes resolving from the substantiallycollimated beam of light a substantially collimated first resolved beamof light and substantially collimated second resolved beam of lightfurther having substantially uniform flux intensity substantially acrossthe beam of light, and step [c] further includes forming thesubstantially collimated single beam of light further havingsubstantially the same uniform flux intensity substantially across thebeam of light as that of each of the resolved beams of light.
 392. Amethod as described in claim 388 further comprising between steps [b]and [c] the step of producing from the substantially collimated firstand second resolved beam of light a substantially collimated first andsecond resolved beam of light having substantially the same selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors, whereby the substantially collimated first and second resolvedbeam of light are parallel and noncollinear.
 393. A method as describedin claim 388 further comprising the step of passing one of thesubstantially collimated resolved beams of light through a means forchanging the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electric field vectors.
 394. A method as described in claim 393wherein the step of passing one of the substantially collimated resolvedbeams of light through a means for changing the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectorsincludes passing one of the substantially collimated resolved beams oflight through a liquid crystal device for changing the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors.
 395. A method as described in claim 388 further comprising thestep of passing one of the substantially collimated resolved beams oflight through a means for changing a selected predetermined orientationof the chosen component of electric field vectors and changing theselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors of one of the substantially collimated resolvedbeam of light to match substantially the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of theother substantially collimated resolved beam of light.
 396. A method asdescribed in claim 388 wherein step [c] further comprises the step ofreflecting one of the substantially collimated resolved beams of lightfrom one or more reflecting means, each of the reflecting means havingmeans for changing the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors.
 397. A method as described inclaim 396 wherein the step of reflecting one of the substantiallycollimated resolved beams of light from one or more reflecting means,each of the reflecting means having means for changing the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors, includes reflecting one of the substantially collimatedresolved beams of light from one or more planar reflecting surfacehaving a dielectric coating, each planar reflecting surface having adielectric coating including means for changing the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors.
 398. A method as described in claim 396 wherein the step ofreflecting one of the substantially collimated resolved beams of lightfrom one or more reflecting means, each of the reflecting means havingmeans for changing the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors, includes reflecting one of thesubstantially collimated resolved beams of light from one or moremirrors having a thin film dielectric material, each mirror having athin film dielectric material including means for changing the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors.
 399. A method as described in claim 388 wherein step [a]includes providing a substantially collimated beam of light furtherhaving randomly changing orientations of a chosen component of electricfield vectors.
 400. A method as described in claim 388 furthercomprising the step of removing from at least one of the beams of lightat least a predetermined portion of a predetermined range ofwavelengths.
 401. A method as described in claim 400 further includingdirecting the removed portions to an absorption means.
 402. A method ofproducing a substantially collimated beam of light having substantiallythe same selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectric field vectors and a substantially uniform flux intensitysubstantially across the beam of light, comprising: [a] providing asubstantially collimated beam of light having a predetermined range ofwavelengths and substantially the same selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electric field vectors; [b]resolving from the substantially collimated beam of light asubstantially collimated first resolved beam of light havingsubstantially a first selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of the electric field vectors and a substantially collimatedsecond resolved beam of light having substantially a second selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electric fieldvectors, whereby the first and second selected predetermined orientationof the chosen component of the electric field vectors are substantiallythe same; and [c] forming from the substantially collimated firstresolved beam of light and the substantially collimated second resolvedbeam of light a substantially collimated single beam of light havingsubstantially the same selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electric field vectors substantially across thesubstantially collimated single beam of light and a substantiallyuniform flux intensity substantially across the substantially collimatedsingle beam of light.
 403. A method as described in claim 402 whereinthe means for providing a substantially collimated beam includesproducing a substantially collimated beam of ultraviolet.
 404. A systemof producing a substantially collimated beam of electromagnetic energyhaving substantially the same selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors and asubstantially uniform flux intensity substantially across the beam ofelectromagnetic energy, comprising: [a] means for providing asubstantially collimated beam of electromagnetic energy having apredetermined range of wavelengths; [b] means for resolving from thesubstantially collimated beam of electromagnetic energy a substantiallycollimated first resolved beam of electromagnetic energy havingsubstantially a first selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors and a substantiallycollimated second resolved beam of electromagnetic energy havingsubstantially a second selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors, whereby the firstand second selected predetermined orientation of the chosen component ofthe electromagnetic wave field vectors are different from one another;and [c] means for forming from the substantially collimated firstresolved beam of electromagnetic energy and the substantially collimatedsecond resolved beam of electromagnetic energy a substantiallycollimated single beam of electromagnetic energy having substantiallythe same selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors substantially across thesubstantially collimated single beam of electromagnetic energy and asubstantially uniform flux intensity substantially across thesubstantially collimated single beam of electromagnetic energy.
 405. Asystem as described in claim 404 wherein the means for forming includesmeans for forming the single beam of electromagnetic energy furtherhaving a rectangular cross sectional area.
 406. A system as described inclaim 404 further comprising means for producing from the substantiallycollimated first and second resolved beam of electromagnetic energy asubstantially collimated first and second resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy having substantially the same selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors.
 407. A system as described in claim 404 wherein themeans for resolving the substantially collimated first resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy and substantially collimated second resolved beamof electromagnetic energy includes means for providing a substantiallyuniform flux intensity substantially across the beam of electromagneticenergy, and the means for forming the substantially collimated singlebeam of electromagnetic energy includes means for providingsubstantially the same uniform flux intensity substantially across thebeam of electromagnetic energy as that of each of the resolved beams ofelectromagnetic energy.
 408. A system as described in claim 404 furthercomprising means for producing from the substantially collimated firstand second resolved beam of electromagnetic energy a substantiallycollimated first and second resolved beam of electromagnetic energyhaving substantially the same selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors, whereby thesubstantially collimated first and second resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy are parallel and noncollinear.
 409. A system asdescribed in claim 404 further comprising means for passing one of thesubstantially collimated resolved beams of electromagnetic energythrough a means for changing the selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors.
 410. Asystem as described in claim 409 wherein the means for passing one ofthe substantially collimated resolved beams of electromagnetic energythrough a means for changing the selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors includesmeans for passing one of the substantially collimated resolved beams ofelectromagnetic energy through a liquid crystal device for changing theselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors.
 411. A system as described in claim404 further comprising the means for passing one of the substantiallycollimated resolved beams of electromagnetic energy through a means forchanging a selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectromagnetic wave field vectors and changing the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors of one of the substantially collimated resolved beamof electromagnetic energy to match substantially the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors of the other substantially collimated resolved beamof electromagnetic energy.
 412. A system as described in claim 404wherein the means for forming further comprises the means for reflectingone of the substantially collimated resolved beams of electromagneticenergy from one or more reflecting means, each of the reflecting meanshaving means for changing the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors.
 413. Asystem as described in claim 412 wherein the means for reflecting one ofthe substantially collimated resolved beams of electromagnetic energyfrom one or more reflecting means includes means for changing theselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors, the means for changing includesmeans for reflecting one of the substantially collimated resolved beamsof electromagnetic energy from one or more planar reflecting surface,having a dielectric coating, each planar reflecting surface having adielectric coating including means for changing the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors.
 414. A system as described in claim 412 wherein themeans for reflecting one of the substantially collimated resolved beamsof electromagnetic energy from one or more reflecting means, includesmeans for changing the selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors, the means forchanging including means for reflecting one of the substantiallycollimated resolved beams of electromagnetic energy from one or moremirrors having a thin film dielectric material, each mirrors having athin film dielectric material including means for changing the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors.
 415. A system as described in claim 404 wherein themeans for providing a substantially collimated beam of electromagneticenergy includes means for randomly changing orientations of a chosencomponent of electromagnetic wave field vectors.
 416. A system asdescribed in claim 404 further comprising the means for removing from atleast one of the beams of electromagnetic energy at least apredetermined portion of a predetermined range of wavelengths.
 417. Asystem as described in claim 416 including means for directing theremoved portions to an absorption means.
 418. A system of producing asubstantially collimated beam of electromagnetic energy havingsubstantially the same selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of electromagnetic wave field vectors and a substantiallyuniform flux intensity substantially across the beam of electromagneticenergy, comprising: [a] means for providing a substantially collimatedbeam of electromagnetic energy having a predetermined range ofwavelengths and substantially the same selected predeterminedorientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wave field vectors;[b] means for resolving from the substantially collimated beam ofelectromagnetic energy a substantially collimated first resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy having substantially a first selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors and a substantially collimated second resolved beamof electromagnetic energy having substantially a second selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors, whereby the first and second selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors are substantially the same as one another; and [c] means forforming from the substantially collimated first resolved beam ofelectromagnetic energy and the substantially collimated second resolvedbeam of electromagnetic energy a substantially collimated single beam ofelectromagnetic energy having substantially the same selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electromagnetic wavefield vectors substantially across the substantially collimated singlebeam of electromagnetic energy and a substantially uniform fluxintensity substantially across the substantially collimated single beamof electromagnetic energy.
 419. A system of producing a substantiallycollimated beam of light having substantially the same selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors and a substantially uniform flux intensity substantially acrossthe beam of light, comprising: [a] means for providing a substantiallycollimated beam of light having a predetermined range of wavelengths;[b] means for resolving from the substantially collimated beam of lighta substantially collimated first resolved beam of light havingsubstantially a first selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of the electric field vectors and a substantially collimatedsecond resolved beam of light having substantially a second selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electric fieldvectors, whereby the first and second selected predetermined orientationof the chosen component of the electric field vectors are different fromone another; and [c] means for forming from the substantially collimatedfirst resolved beam of light and the substantially collimated secondresolved beam of light a substantially collimated single beam of lighthaving substantially the same selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electric field vectors substantially across thesubstantially collimated single beam of light and a substantiallyuniform flux intensity substantially across the substantially collimatedsingle beam of light.
 420. A system as described in claim 419 whereinthe means for forming includes means for forming the single beam oflight further having a rectangular cross sectional area.
 421. A systemas described in claim 419 further comprising means for producing fromthe substantially collimated first and second resolved beam of light asubstantially collimated first and second resolved beam of light havingsubstantially the same selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors.
 422. A system as described inclaim 419 wherein the means for resolving the substantially collimatedfirst resolved beam of light and substantially collimated secondresolved beam of light includes means for providing a substantiallyuniform flux intensity substantially across the beam of light, and themeans for forming the substantially collimated single beam of lightincludes means for forming substantially the same uniform flux intensitysubstantially across the beam of light as that of each of the resolvedbeams of light.
 423. A system as described in claim 419 furthercomprising means for producing from the substantially collimated firstand second resolved beam of light a substantially collimated first andsecond resolved beam of light having substantially the same selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors, whereby the substantially collimated first and second resolvedbeam of light are parallel and noncollinear.
 424. A system as describedin claim 419 further comprising the means for passing one of thesubstantially collimated resolved beams of light through a means forchanging the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electric field vectors.
 425. A system as described in claim 424wherein the means for passing one of the substantially collimatedresolved beams of light through a means for changing the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors includes passing one of the substantially collimated resolvedbeams of light through a liquid crystal device for changing the selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors.
 426. A system as described in claim 419 further comprising themeans for passing one of the substantially collimated resolved beams oflight through a means for changing a selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of electric field vectors and changing theselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors of one of the substantially collimated resolvedbeam of light to match substantially the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of theother substantially collimated resolved beam of light.
 427. A system asdescribed in claim 419 wherein means for forming further comprises themeans for reflecting one of the substantially collimated resolved beamsof light from one or more reflecting means, each of the reflecting meanshaving means for changing the selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electric field vectors.
 428. A system asdescribed in claim 427 wherein the means for reflecting one of thesubstantially collimated resolved beams of light from one or morereflecting means, includes means for changing the selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors, themeans for changing including means for reflecting one of thesubstantially collimated resolved beams of light from one or more planarreflecting surface having a dielectric coating, each planar reflectingsurface having a dielectric coating including means for changing theselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectric field vectors.
 429. A system as described in claim 427 whereinthe means for reflecting one of the substantially collimated resolvedbeams of light from one or more reflecting means, includes means forchanging the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electric field vectors, the means for changing including meansfor reflecting one of the substantially collimated resolved beams oflight from one or more mirrors having a thin film dielectric material,each mirror having a thin film dielectric material including means forchanging the selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electric field vectors.
 430. A system as described in claim 419wherein the means for providing a substantially collimated beam of lightincludes means for randomly changing orientations of a chosen componentof electric field vectors.
 431. A system as described in claim 419further comprising the means for removing from at least one of the beamsof light at least a predetermined portion of a predetermined range ofwavelengths.
 432. A system as described in claim 431 including means fordirecting the removed portions to an absorption means.
 433. A system ofproducing a substantially collimated beam of light having substantiallythe same selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofelectric field vectors and a substantially uniform flux intensitysubstantially across the beam of light, comprising: [a] means forproviding a substantially collimated beam of light having apredetermined range of wavelengths and substantially the same selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of electric fieldvectors; [b] means for resolving from the substantially collimated beamof light a substantially collimated first resolved beam of light havingsubstantially a first selected predetermined orientation of a chosencomponent of the electric field vectors and a substantially collimatedsecond resolved beam of light having substantially a second selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electric fieldvectors, whereby the first and second selected predetermined orientationof the chosen component of the electric field vectors are substantiallythe same; and [c] means for forming from the substantially collimatedfirst resolved beam of light and the substantially collimated secondresolved beam of light a substantially collimated single beam of lighthaving substantially the same selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of electric field vectors substantially across thesubstantially collimated single beam of light and a substantiallyuniform flux intensity substantially across the substantially collimatedsingle beam of light.
 434. A system as described in claim 419 whereinthe means for providing a substantially collimated beam includes meansfor producing a substantially collimated beam of ultraviolet.
 435. Amethod of producing a modulated beam of electromagnetic energycomprising: [a] providing an initial collimated beam of electromagneticenergy having randomly changing orientations of the selected componentof the electromagnetic wave field vectors and having a substantiallyuniform flux intensity across substantially the entire beam; [b]resolving from the initial collimated beam of electromagnetic energy aninitial collimated first resolved beam of electromagnetic energy havingsubstantially a first single selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors and aninitial collimated second resolved beam of electromagnetic energy havingsubstantially a second single selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors, whereby thefirst and second single selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors are different fromone another; [c] forming from the initial collimated first resolved beamof electromagnetic energy and the initial collimated second resolvedbeam of electromagnetic energy a substantially collimated rectangularinitial single beam of electromagnetic energy having substantially thesame single selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component ofthe electromagnetic wave field vectors across substantially the entirebeam of electromagnetic energy and a substantially uniform fluxintensity across substantially the entire initial collimated single beamof electromagnetic energy; [d] separating the collimated rectangularinitial single beam of electromagnetic energy into two or more separatecollimated rectangular beams of electromagnetic energy whereby each ofthe separate collimated rectangular beams of electromagnetic energy hasthe same single selected predetermined orientation of a chosen componentof the electromagnetic wave field vectors as that of the other separatecollimated rectangular beams of electromagnetic energy and each separatecollimated rectangular beam of electromagnetic energy having a differentelectromagnetic energy from the other separate collimated rectangularbeams of electromagnetic energy; [e] adjusting the electromagneticenergy by removing at least a predetermined portion of electromagneticenergy of at least one of the separate collimated rectangular beams ofelectromagnetic energy and directing the removed portion to a beam stopwhereby the removed portion is removed; [f] altering the single selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors of a plurality of portions of each separatecollimated rectangular beam of electromagnetic energy by passing aplurality of portions of each separate collimated rectangular beam ofelectromagnetic energy through a respective one of a plurality ofaltering means whereby the single selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of theplurality of portions of each separate beam of electromagnetic energy isaltered in response to a stimulus means by applying a signal means tothe stimulus means in a predetermined manner as the plurality ofportions of each of the substantially collimated separate beams ofelectromagnetic energy passes through the respective one of theplurality of altering the single selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors; [g]combining the altered separate collimated rectangular beams ofelectromagnetic energy into a single collimated rectangular collinearelectromagnetic energy beam without substantially changing the alteredselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors of the plurality of portions of eachseparate collimated rectangular beam of electromagnetic energy; [h]resolving from the single collimated rectangular collinearelectromagnetic energy beam a first collimated rectangular resolvedelectromagnetic energy beam having substantially a first single selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors and second collimated rectangular resolvedelectromagnetic energy beam having substantially a second singleselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors, whereby the first and second singleselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors are different from one another; and[i] passing one of the first collimated rectangular or second collimatedrectangular resolved electromagnetic energy beams to a projection means.436. A system of producing a modulated beam of electromagnetic energysuitable for projection of video images, comprising: [a] means forproviding an initial collimated beam of electromagnetic energy havingrandomly changing orientations of the selected component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors and having a substantially uniformflux intensity across substantially the entire beam; [b] means forresolving from the initial collimated beam of electromagnetic energy aninitial collimated first resolved beam of electromagnetic energy havingsubstantially a first single selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors and aninitial collimated second resolved beam of electromagnetic energy havingsubstantially a second single selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors, whereby thefirst and second single selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electromagnetic wave field vectors are different fromone another; [c] means for forming from the initial collimated firstresolved beam of electromagnetic energy and the initial collimatedsecond resolved beam of electromagnetic energy a substantiallycollimated rectangular initial single beam of electromagnetic energyhaving substantially the same single selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors acrosssubstantially the entire beam of electromagnetic energy and asubstantially uniform flux intensity across substantially the entireinitial collimated single beam of electromagnetic energy; [d] means forseparating the collimated rectangular initial single beam ofelectromagnetic energy into two or more separate collimated rectangularbeams of electromagnetic energy whereby each of the separate collimatedrectangular beams of electromagnetic energy has the same single selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electromagneticwave field vectors as that of the other separate collimated rectangularbeams of electromagnetic energy and each separate collimated rectangularbeam of electromagnetic energy having a different electromagnetic energyfrom the other separate collimated rectangular beams of electromagneticenergy; [e] means for adjusting the by removing at least a predeterminedportion of electromagnetic energy of at least one of the separatecollimated rectangular beams of electromagnetic energy and directing theremoved portion to a beam stop whereby the removed portion is absorbed;[f] means for altering the single selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors of aplurality of portions of each separate collimated rectangular beam ofelectromagnetic energy by passing a plurality of portions of eachseparate collimated rectangular beam of electromagnetic energy through arespective one of a plurality of altering means whereby the singleselected predetermined orientation of the chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors of the plurality of portions of eachseparate beam of electromagnetic energy is altered in response to astimulus means by applying a signal means to the stimulus means in apredetermined manner as the plurality of portions of each of thesubstantially collimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy passesthrough the respective one of the plurality of altering the singleselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of theelectromagnetic wave field vectors; [g] means for combining the alteredseparate collimated rectangular beams of electromagnetic energy into asingle collimated rectangular collinear electromagnetic energy beamwithout substantially changing the altered selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electromagnetic wave fieldvectors of the plurality of portions of each separate collimatedrectangular beam of electromagnetic energy; [h] means for resolving fromthe single collimated rectangular collinear electromagnetic energy beama first collimated rectangular resolved electromagnetic energy beamhaving substantially a first single selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors andsecond collimated rectangular resolved electromagnetic energy beamhaving substantially a second single selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors, wherebythe first and second single selected predetermined orientation of thechosen component of the electromagnetic wave field vectors are differentfrom one another; and [i] means for passing one of the first collimatedrectangular or second collimated rectangular resolved electromagneticenergy beam to a projection means.
 437. A method of producing amodulated beam of light suitable for projection of video images,comprising: [a] providing an initial collimated beam of light havingrandomly changing orientations of the selected component of the electricfield vectors and having a substantially uniform flux intensity acrosssubstantially the entire beam; [b] resolving from the initial collimatedbeam of light an initial collimated first resolved beam of light havingsubstantially a first single selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of the electric field vectors and an initial collimatedsecond resolved beam of light having substantially a second singleselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electricfield vectors, whereby the first and second single selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors are different from one another; [c] forming from the initialcollimated first resolved beam of light and the initial collimatedsecond resolved beam of light a substantially collimated rectangularinitial single beam of light having substantially the same singleselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electricfield vectors across substantially the entire beam of light and asubstantially uniform flux intensity across substantially the entireinitial collimated single beam of light; [d] separating the collimatedrectangular initial single beam of light into two or more separatecollimated rectangular beams of color whereby each of the separatecollimated rectangular beams of color has the same single selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electric fieldvectors as that of the other separate collimated rectangular beams ofcolors and each separate collimated rectangular beam of color having adifferent color from the other separate collimated rectangular beam ofcolors; [e] adjusting the color by removing at least a predeterminedportion of color of at least one of the separate collimated rectangularbeams of color and directing the removed portion to a beam stop wherebythe removed portion is absorbed; [f] altering the single selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors of a plurality of portions of each separate collimatedrectangular beam of color by passing a plurality of portions of eachseparate collimated rectangular beam of color through a respective oneof plurality of altering means whereby the single selected predeterminedorientation of the chosen component of the electric field vectors of theplurality of portions of each separate beam of color is altered inresponse to a stimulus means by applying a signal means to the stimulusmeans in a predetermined manner as the plurality of portions of each ofthe substantially collimated separate beams of electromagnetic energypasses through the respective one of the plurality of altering thesingle selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of theelectric field vectors; [g] combining the altered separate collimatedrectangular beams of color into a single collimated rectangularcollinear color beam without substantially changing the altered selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors of the plurality of portions of each separate collimatedrectangular beam of color. [h] resolving from the single collimatedrectangular collinear color beam having substantially a first singleselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electricfield vectors and second collimated rectangular resolved color beamhaving substantially a second single selected predetermined orientationof chosen component of the electric field vectors, whereby the first andsecond single selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electric field vectors are different from one another; and [i]passing one of the first collimated rectangular or second collimatedrectangular resolved color beam to a projection means.
 438. A system ofproducing a modulated beam of light suitable for projection of videoimages, comprising: [a] means for providing an initial collimated beamof light having randomly changing orientations of the selected componentof the electric field vectors and having a substantially uniform fluxintensity across substantially the entire beam; [b] means for resolvingfrom the initial collimated beam of light an initial collimated firstresolved beam of light having substantially a first single selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electric fieldvectors and an initial collimated second resolved beam of light havingsubstantially a second single selected predetermined orientation of achosen component of the electric field vectors, whereby the first andsecond single selected predetermined orientation of the chosen componentof the electric field vectors are different from one another; [c] meansfor forming from the initial collimated first resolved beam of light andthe initial collimated second resolved beam of light a substantiallycollimated rectangular initial single beam of light having substantiallythe same single selected predetermined orientation of a chosen componentof the electric field vectors across substantially the entire beam oflight and a substantially uniform flux intensity across substantiallythe entire initial collimated single beam of light; [d] means forseparating the collimated rectangular initial single beam of light intotwo or more separate collimated rectangular beams of color whereby eachof the separate collimated rectangular beams of color has the samesingle selected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of theelectric field vectors as that of the other separate collimatedrectangular beams of color and each separate collimated rectangular beamof color having a different color from the other separate collimatedrectangular beams of color; [e] means for adjusting the color byremoving at least a predetermined portion of color of at least one ofthe separate collimated rectangular beams of color and directing theremoved portion to a beam stop whereby the removed portion is absorbed;[f] means for altering the single selected predetermined orientation ofthe chosen component of the electric field vectors of a plurality ofportions of each separate collimated rectangular beam of color bypassing a plurality of portions of each separate collimated rectangularbeam of color through a respective one of a plurality of altering meanswhereby the single selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors of the plurality of portions ofeach separate beam of color is altered in response to a stimulus meansby applying a signal means to the stimulus means in a predeterminedmanner as the plurality of portions of each of the substantiallycollimated separate beams of electromagnetic energy passes through therespective one of the plurality of altering the single selectedpredetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electric fieldvectors; [g] means for combining the altered separate collimatedrectangular beams of color into a single collimated rectangularcollinear color beam without substantially changing the altered selectedpredetermined orientation of the chosen component of the electric fieldvectors of the plurality of portions of each separate collimatedrectangular beam of color; [h] means for resolving from the singlecollimated rectangular collinear color beam a first collimatedrectangular resolved color beam having substantially a first singleselected predetermined orientation of a chosen component of the electricfield vectors and second collimated rectangular resolved color beamhaving substantially a second single selected predetermined orientationof a chosen component of the electric field vectors, whereby the firstand second single selected predetermined orientation of the chosencomponent of the electric field vectors are different one from another;and [i] means for passing one of the first collimated rectangular orsecond collimated rectangular resolved color beam to a projection means.